MULTICS

                    SOFTWARE RELEASE BULLETIN

                          RELEASE 10.2



                          PREPARED BY:

                  MULTICS SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT








                        January 27, 1984
























     Copyright, (C) Honeywell Information Systems Inc., 1984








                            SECTION 1


                          INTRODUCTION




Multics Release  10.2 (MR10.2) is a  complete release and assumes
the prior installation of MR9.1.   That is, the library tapes are
self-supporting and  do not require any  other information to run
Multics.


This  document  includes  descriptions  of  features  included in
previous Multics Releases, MR10.0 and  MR10.1, in addition to the
features included in the current  release, MR10.2.  A notation of
(10.0), (10.1), or (10.2) at  the beginning of an item identifies
the specific release associated with  that item.  This is done as
an aid to sites upgrading from a previous version of the system.


A separate document, Installation  Instructions, is supplied with
the  release tapes.   The Installation  Instructions describe the
contents  of  the  release   tapes  and  include  procedures  for
installation of MR10.2.


Additional  documentation  is  provided with  the  release tapes,
either as printable segments on  the tape (in a special directory
>doc>MR10.2), or as paper copy.


Following  is  a summary  of  the remainder  of sections  in this
document.

     Section 2
          summarizes important highlights.

     Section 3
          describes significant software changes.

     Section 4
          describes incompatible changes.





Introduction                   1-1                        SRB10.2


     Appendix A
          contains  a  partial  list   of  new  commands,  active
          functions, and subroutines.

     Appendix B
          contains  a  list of  Priced Software  Products.  These
          items  are available  only through  contractual actions
          with a Honeywell sales representative.

     Appendix C
          describes the associated documentation.

     Appendix D
          describes reliability and  availability enhancements to
          the  Multics  storage  system   in  more  detail.   The
          enhancements are summarized in Section 3.

     Appendix E
          describes changes made to some internal interfaces used
          by  multiplexers  to  allow   recovery  of  masked  FNP
          channels.

     Appendix F
          describes various considerations  and limitations which
          need to be taken into  account when using the Satellite
          6M product.

     Appendix G
          provides  a complete  list of reported  errors fixed in
          MR10.2.

























Introduction                   1-2                        SRB10.2








                            SECTION 2


                      HIGHLIGHTS OF MR10.2




This section contains a brief summary of the more important items
of the release.  Refer to Section 3 for a detailed description.


_H_A_R_D_W_A_R_E _S_U_P_P_O_R_T

 ox    (10.0) Support for running four I/O Multiplexers.

 ox    (10.0)  Support  for  operating I/O  Multiplexers  in paged
      mode.

 ox    (10.1)  Support  for  new Embedded  Unit  Record Controller
      (EURC), models URP8001, URP8002, and URP8004.

 ox    (10.1)  Support  for  new   printers,  models  PRU0901  and
      PRU1201.

 ox    (10.0) Support for new tape drive, model MTU0630.

 ox    (10.0)  Support for  new broadband  communications channels
      (HDLC and BSC) operating at up to 72K bits per second.

 ox    (10.1) Froze software enhancements  for Datanet 355 (DN6632
      models) at  the MR10.0 level.  Future  enhancements will be
      applied only to DN6678 FNPs having at least 64KW of memory.


_S_U_P_E_R_V_I_S_O_R

 ox    (10.0)  Improved  reliability and  availability  of Multics
      Storage  System,  with provisions  for quick  recovery from
      system crashes without ESD.

 ox    (10.1)  Provided  for  salvage  of  physical  volumes while
      online and in use by the system.

 ox    (10.1)  Improved  efficiency  of  VTOCE access  with  a net
      increase in wired system memory for VTOCE I/O.



Highlights                     2-1                        SRB10.2


 ox    (10.0)   Improved  directory   locking  strategy,  reducing
      directory lock contention.

 ox    (10.0)  Improved  stack   management  algorithm  to  reduce
      writing of unused stack pages to disk.

 ox    (10.2) Installed a new operator support package that offers
      dynamic console recovery in console failure situations.


_C_O_M_M_U_N_I_C_A_T_I_O_N_S

 ox    (10.0) Support for high data communication rates, up to 72K
      bits per second for synchronous channels (HDLC and BSC) and
      up to 19.2K bits per second for asynchronous channels.

 ox    (10.1)  Changed   FNP  software  to   allocate  buffers  at
      addresses  above 32K  to allow use  of up to  256K words of
      memory.


_N_E_W _U_S_E_R _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E

 ox    (10.0)  Added  the  enter_output_request  command  to enter
      printer, punch, and plotter requests more easily.

 ox    (10.0)  Added  the  dial_out   command  to  make  out-bound
      connections from  Multics to other systems  via an autocall
      channel.

 ox    (10.1) Added new line editing features to the video system.

 ox    (10.1)  Added  enhancements to  tape_mult_  performance and
      error handling.

 ox    (10.1) Provided  tahe ssu_ subsystem  utilities for writing
      application subsystems.

 ox    (10.2)  Installed the  analyze_multics command  to invoke a
      subsystem  that permits  the scanning of  a Multics address
      space for analysis.

 ox    (10.2)  Modified  the  printer   DIM  to  provide  improved
      performance for devices controlled  by Embedded Unit Record
      Controllers (EURCs).

 ox    (10.2)  Changed the  Volume Reloader to  allow reloading of
      multiple physical volumes in a single invocation.


_P_R_I_C_E_D _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E _P_R_O_D_U_C_T_S

 ox    (10.0) Added the Forum facility for electronic meetings.


Highlights                     2-2                        SRB10.2


 ox    (10.0)  Added   the  Inter-Multics  File   Transfer  (IMFT)
      facility for copying files between Multics systems.

 ox    (10.1)  Enhanced access  checking and  provided AIM support
      for IMFT file transfers.

 ox    (10.0) Added  the COBOL and FORTRAN  interfaces to the Menu
      Manager facility.

 ox    (10.0) Support for X.25 communications networks.

 ox    (10.1) Support X.25 LAPB protocol.

 ox    (10.1) Added significant enhancements  to the Extended Mail
      Facility  (read_mail, print_mail,  and send_mail) including
      use of mailing  lists and being able to  send mail to forum
      meetings.

 ox    (10.1)  Added  MRDS   database  restructuring  capabilities
      (restructure_mrds_db).

 ox    (10.2)  Installed APL  Version 5.02 to  provide several new
      features.

 ox    (10.2) Certified level 2 and  level 3 Multics X.25 software
      with TELENET and UNINET.

 ox    (10.2) Certified FORTRAN ansi77 FIPS.

 ox    (10.2)  Enhanced   FORTRAN  to  support   LA/VLA  to  allow
      individual arrays of up to 2**24 words.

 ox    (10.2)  Enhanced  the IMFT  facility  to allow  the  use of
      communications methods other than HASP.

 ox    (10.2) Support has been added  to Multics for the Satellite
      6M product over an X.25 connection.

 ox    (10.2) Enhanced  Satellite 6M to  allow the L6  to initiate
      file transfers to or from Multics.

 ox    (10.2)  Installed  the LINUS  Report Writer  which includes
      horizontal and vertical scrolling.

 ox    (10.2) GCOS simulator supports the latest GCOS III release,
      4JS3 update 7.

 ox    (10.2)  Prior to  January 1983  the Network  Tools product,
      SGC6806,   provided  the   Multics  user   with  networking
      capability  via   ARPANET.   Effective  January   1983  the
      communications  protocol  for  ARPANET was  changed  by the
      Federal Government from NCP  to TCP/IP protocol.  Installed
      a  new  networking package  with TCP/IP  protocol replacing


Highlights                     2-3                        SRB10.2


      SGC6806 in order to allow  Multics users to continue access
      to  ARPANET.   Multics  customers  interested  in accessing
      ARPANET  should  contact  their  Sales  Representative  for
      additional information.



















































Highlights                     2-4                        SRB10.2








                            SECTION 3


                       CONTENTS OF MR10.2




_P_E_R_F_O_R_M_A_N_C_E _E_N_H_A_N_C_E_M_E_N_T_S


_S_y_s_t_e_m _I_n_i_t_i_a_l_i_z_a_t_i_o_n


B- 1. (10.0)  Improved  the method  used  to clear  memory before
      booting Multics for faster system initialization.

B- 2. (10.0)  Rename  the  >sl1  directory at  each  bootload and
      create a new >sl1 directory is created.  This change allows
      the system  to bootload successfully, even  if the old >sl1
      is damaged.  It  also allows segments in >sl1  to be spread
      over all  of the RLV  volumes rather than  residing only on
      the RPV, thereby reducing disk  contention on the RPV.  The
      delete_old_pdds program deletes  the renamed directory once
      the system is up.  The volume salvager deletes any segments
      subordinate to an old >sl1 directory.

B- 3. (10.0) Changed the  CDT to include a permanent  tree of the
      multiplexer  hierarchy.  This  allows multiplexers  to load
      more quickly  as the tree need  not be reconstructed during
      the loading operation.  Quicker loading speeds up answering
      service initialization.

B- 4. (10.0)  Changed the  Multics Storage System  to improve the
      reliability and availability of the system.  The changes in
      MR10.0 allow the system to recover quickly after almost all
      types  of crashes.   The quick  recovery is  implemented by
      software  which  maintains  storage  system  volumes  in  a
      consistent  state,  at all  times, and  allows the  site to
      defer  volume  salvaging  operations  to  a  site-scheduled
      maintenance  period.  (Refer  to Appendix D  for details of
      the changes.)







Contents of MR10.2             3-1                        SRB10.2


_S_y_s_t_e_m _O_p_e_r_a_t_i_o_n


C- 1. (10.0)  Changed  directory  control to  use  a multireader,
      single-writer  locking  strategy   for  directories.   This
      change improves performance by reducing the lock wait times
      for  directories,  and  eliminates  the  problem  of notify
      timeouts, waiting to lock >udd.

C- 2. (10.0)   Changed   ipc_$block  (actually   fast_hc_ipc)  to
      truncate the user-ring stack in certain situations prior to
      blocking the  process.  The stack is  truncated to the page
      after  the  current  stack_end_ptr.   This  change improves
      performance  by avoiding  disk writes for  pages beyond the
      last stack frame.

C- 3. (10.0)  Changed  hcs_$star_  and  hcs_$status_  to  operate
      without   using   the  hardcore   system_free_seg,  thereby
      reducing  page  faults  taken  in  these  hcs_  primitives.
      Removed system_free_seg from hardcore.

C- 4. (10.0) Changed FNP software to gain efficiency.  The change
      allows FNP throughput rates  of more than 10,000 characters
      per  second per  FNP using  Bisync protocol,  and more than
      20,000  characters  per  second   per  FNP  using  X.25/LAP
      protocols.

C- 5. (10.1)  Redesigned VTOCE  buffer management  to improve the
      efficiency of VTOCE access.  More  wired memory is used for
      VTOCE  buffers  resulting  in considerable  savings  in the
      number  of  VTOCE I/Os.   Each  buffer is  large  enough to
      contain an  entire VTOCE (192 words).   The net increase in
      wired system  memory for VTOCE I/O  is 128 words multiplied
      by the number of VTOCE buffers used.


_U_s_e_r _S_o_f_t_w_a_r_e


D- 1. (10.1)  Installed  tape_ioi_ (a  new  tape interface)  as a
      replacement  for  the undocumented  tdcm_  interface.  User
      programs using  tdcm_ should be converted  to tape_ioi_ due
      to   the  improved   functionality,  error   recovery,  and
      performance.   The  tdcm_  interfaces will  continue  to be
      supported  for  the  immediate  future.   Of  the  tape I/O
      modules supplied  with the system, only  the tape_mult_ I/O
      module has been converted to  use tape_ioi_.  The other I/O
      modules will be converted in a future release.







Contents of MR10.2             3-2                        SRB10.2


D- 2. (10.1)     Added      the     new     realtime_io_priority,
      realtime_io_deadline,   and    realtime_io_quantum   tuning
      parameters   to  improve   throughput  of   tape  I/O-bound
      processes.  A  site may improve tape  throughput by setting
      realtime_io_priority to ON and  using the default values of
      realtime_io_deadline (0.   seconds) and realtime_io_quantum
      (0.005 seconds).

D- 3. (10.1)  Installed  a  new  version of  the  ted  command to
      provide a new buffer manipulation strategy and incompatibly
      changed the SAFE environments.

      The  new buffer  manipulation strategy makes  better use of
      segments and  significantly reduced the  amount of modified
      pages in disk queues, thereby improving performance.

D- 4. (10.1)  Updated  the buffer  manipulation strategy  used by
      qedx  to  make  better  use of  segments  and significantly
      reduce the number of modified pages in disk queues.

D- 5. (10.2)  Improved  the performance  of  sort_seg, sort_seg_,
      sort_items_,  and  sort_items_indirect_  by  changing  to a
      simpler  sorting  algorithm  which  was  coded  in  ALM  to
      increase efficiency.


_H_A_R_D_W_A_R_E _S_U_P_P_O_R_T


_I_/_O _M_u_l_t_i_p_l_e_x_e_r


E- 1. (10.0) Supports  up to four  IOMs, an increase  of two from
      previous  releases.   The  increased  number  of  IOMs  can
      support   larger   disk  configurations   and   other  high
      performance IO connections.  This  support is restricted to
      the Multics system.   No changes have been made  to the BOS
      operating  system.   Attempts  to  use  BOS  to  access  IO
      channels not  connected to the  first or second  IOM in the
      system  configuration results  in failure.   This means all
      MPCs must be connected to IOM A  or B in order for the SAVE
      and RESTOR  commands to operate.  In  addition, BOS must be
      booted using IOM A.












Contents of MR10.2             3-3                        SRB10.2


E- 2. (10.0) Supports operation of an IOM in paged mode.  Support
      is   provided   for   mixed  (paged   and   nonpaged)  mode
      configurations.

      In  paged  mode,  buffers  used  for  IO  can  be allocated
      anywhere  within the  lower order  SCU.  In  nonpaged mode,
      they can  be allocated only  in the lowest 256K  of the low
      order SCU.  Therefore, if a  site has only paged mode IOMs,
      buffers are allocated on noncontiguous pages throughout the
      low order SCU.  This makes it feasible to allocate more and
      larger  IO  buffers,  and contention  for  low-order memory
      space is  reduced.  If a  site has mixed  configuration, or
      only  nonpaged  IOMs,  buffers   must  still  be  allocated
      contiguously in the low 256K.

      Paged mode IOMs are enabled  by specifying a model field of
      NSA on the IOM config  card.  Nonpaged mode is indicated by
      the IOMB model name.


_P_e_r_i_p_h_e_r_a_l _D_e_v_i_c_e_s


F- 1. (10.0) The PRU1000 printer can  now be used as model number
      1000 instead of 1200.

F- 2. (10.0) Supports MTU0630 tape drives.

F- 3. (10.0)  Removed  support  for  the  IBM  selectric consoles
      (CO8030 and CO8031).

F- 4. (10.1)  Embedded  Unit  Record  Controller  (EURC),  models
      URP8001,  URP8002  and  URP8004  are  now  supported.   The
      following unit  record devices may be  attached through the
      EURC:

                   printers:  PRU0901, PRU1000, PRU1200, PRU1201,
                              PRU1600
               card readers:  CRU0500, CRU1050
         combined card unit:  CCU0401
               card punches:  PCU0120, PCU0121

      The EURC can be used in a mixed configuration with URMPCs.

F- 5. (10.1)  Two  new  printers,   models  PRU0901  and  PRU1201
      (through the new EURC) are now supported.









Contents of MR10.2             3-4                        SRB10.2


F- 6. (10.2)  Modified  the  printer   DIM  to  generate  channel
      programs  which  provide improved  performance  for devices
      controlled  by  EURCs.  The  performance  for free-standing
      Unit Record MPCs is not affected by this change.

      Retained    a    copy    of    the    previous    DIM    in
      >system_library_obsolete.   Note  that the  printer daemons
      should  be in  a realtime  work class.   Parameters such as
      initial_quantum and quantum of 0.5 and initial_response and
      response  of   0.1  generally  give   satisfactory  printer
      performance.   (Refer to  the description of  ed_mgt in MAM
      System, Order No.  AK50.)

F- 7. (10.2)  It  is now  possible  to configure  a  Multics tape
      subsystem with  two physical channels, using  the chnl card
      (just as  it is used  for disk subsystems).   This allows a
      site  to  achieve  maximum   redundancy  by,  for  example,
      connecting each physical channel to a different IOM.  (Note
      that   hardware  configuration   requirements  have  always
      required  a  second  physical  channel if  there  were tape
      handlers with  device numbers between 9  and 16 configured,
      but  Multics  would not  make  use of  the  second physical
      channel).   With  this change,  it is  no longer  proper to
      configure a tape MPC with two logical channels per physical
      channel.  There is no performance  benefit in doing so, and
      for   several  reasons,   such  configurations   can  cause
      operational  difficulties.   For  example,  if  two logical
      channels are  configured to a  physical channel, it  is not
      always possible to recover all  of the error status after a
      tape  error.   Also, it  is  possible for  read  errors and
      hardware retries  on one logical channel  to "lock out" the
      other logical channel long enough to cause a timeout.

      An example of the config cards to describe a tape subsystem
      with with two physical channels follows:
         prph  tapa  a  16.  1  630.  2  610.  6  630.  2
         chnl  tapa  b  16.  1
         mpc  mtpa  610.  a  16.  1  b  16.  1


_C_o_m_m_u_n_i_c_a_t_i_o_n_s


G- 1. (10.0)  The  Multics  Communication  System  (CS)  supports
      High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) communication protocol.










Contents of MR10.2             3-5                        SRB10.2


G- 2. (10.0) The  CS also supports  communication channels having
      higher data transfer rates.  Specifically, CS supports:

          CHANNEL NAME            MARKETING ID       DATA RATE

      Broad-Band Bisync (BSC)       DCF6621        up to 72K bps
      Broad-Band HDLC               DCF6622        up to 72K bps
      HDLC                          DCF6620        up to 9600 bps

G- 3. (10.2)  Added CS  support for  HDLC channel  CCITT-V.35 for
      data rates up to 72K bps.  The Marketing ID is DCF6623.


REMOVAL OF SUPPORT


H- 1. (10.2) With  the next release of  Multics Software, MR11.0,
      certain  products  will be  decommitted from  support.  MCS
      support  for the  following items  will NOT  be included in
      MR11.0:

 ox    Datanet 6616/6624/6632/355

 ox    IBM 1050 and IBM 2741 terminals

 ox    Bell 202 ETX protocol

 ox    ARDS terminals

H- 2. (10.2)Support  for  non-paged IOM's  will also  be deleted.
      All  IOM   functions  will  use  the   paged  mode.   Other
      peripheral  devices  for  which  support  will  be  removed
      include:

 ox    PRU2XX - the 200 series of printers.

 ox    PRU3XX - the 300 series of printers.

 ox    DSU 180/181 - removable disc.

 ox    DSU 190/191 - removable disc.

 ox    MTP4XX - the 400 series of tape controllers.

 ox    SC6000 - the system control center.

If further  information is needed, please  contact your marketing
representative.







Contents of MR10.2             3-6                        SRB10.2


_B_O_S


I- 1. (10.0) Installed the RDLABL BOS command to display the name
      of a storage system pack  including a notation of last time
      updated.

I- 2. (10.0) Changed the SAVE and  RESTOR BOS commands to display
      the name  of the target  pack including a  notation of last
      time updated.

I- 3. (10.1) Changed the  size of the CONFIG deck  from a maximum
      of 63 cards to a maximum of 127 cards.

I- 4. (10.2) Changed the BOS directory  size from 83 entries to a
      maximum of 152 entries.


_S_U_P_E_R_V_I_S_O_R


_S_y_s_t_e_m _I_n_i_t_i_a_l_i_z_a_t_i_o_n


J- 1. (10.0)  Enhanced the  checking of CPU  Data Switches during
      initialization   of    the   bootload   CPU    and   during
      reconfiguration  of  other  CPUs.   A  warning  message  is
      displayed on the  console when the switches are  not set to
      the proper value (010000717200).

J- 2. (10.2)   Installed  changes   to  improve   the  cold  boot
      procedure, provide improved disk error reporting, and clean
      up initialization.

J- 3. (10.2) If an  attempt to load a multiplexer  (other than an
      FNP) which  does not have the  "hardwired" attribute fails,
      the  load is  automatically retried  until either  the load
      succeeds or a dump_mpx command  is issued.  As a result, if
      the multiplexer needs  to be dialed up from  a remote site,
      and the dialup fails, the Multics operator no longer has to
      reload  the  multiplexer  manually  in order  to  allow the
      remote dialup  to be retried.   It is recommended  that any
      multiplexer  that  is  in  fact  hardwired,  be  given  the
      "hardwired" attribute in the CDT.

J- 4. (10.2)  Changed the  CPU config  card image  to include the
      processor  cache  size  following  the cpu  type  and model
      number.   Refer  to the  Multics Operators  Handbook, Order
      Number AM81, for details.






Contents of MR10.2             3-7                        SRB10.2


J- 5. (10.2)  Increased  the  dedicated  memory  required  to run
      ISOLTS from 64K to 128K  for DPS8 CPUs to facilitate better
      cache testing.   The memory required  to run ISOLTS  on L68
      CPUs remains at 64K.


_C_o_n_f_i_g_u_r_a_t_i_o_n _P_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s


K- 1. (10.0) Eliminated the TBLS DBM config card parameter.  With
      this   release  the   size  of   dbm_seg  is   set,  during
      initialization,  to  the maximum  necessary to  support all
      configured disk devices.

K- 2. (10.0) Added a model field to the IOM card to support model
      6000-B IOMs running  in paged mode.  A model  field of IOMB
      indicates a model  6000 IOM running unpaged and  a field of
      NSA indicates a 6000-B IOM running in paged mode.  (See the
      associated Installation Instructions for further details.)

K- 3. (10.0)  Added an  RVTC card to  specify the  number of VTOC
      entries  to  be  placed  on  the  RPV  during  a  BOOT COLD
      operation.  If  this card is omitted,  Multics computes the
      number of VTOCE entries, based upon an average segment size
      of two pages.  Some sites  may find this computed value too
      large for their needs.

K- 4. (10.0)  Changed  the Initializer  to  place a  copy  of the
      config  deck into  syserr log.   The deck  occupies several
      syserr messages, whose text message is "Config deck, part M
      of N".   The binary portion  of the messages  is the binary
      representation  of  the cards  in  the config  deck.   In a
      future release  these messages will be  used by an improved
      device error reporting facility.

K- 5. (10.0) The SALV card keywords CNSL, PDLY, and DUMP keywords
      are  ignored.  Refer  to "Storage  System Enhancements" for
      details on salvager changes.

K- 6. (10.1) The default size of scavenger_data is 70 KW to allow
      one Scavenger to run at a time.  The size of scavenger_data
      may  be adjusted  by means of  the TBLS SCAV  card which is
      documented  in  the  MOH.    Increasing  the  size  of  the
      scavenger_data  may  require  increasing  the  size  of the
      Hardcore  Partition  on  root volumes.   Refer  to "Storage
      System Enhancements" below for details on the Scavenger.









Contents of MR10.2             3-8                        SRB10.2


K- 7. (10.1)  The number  of VTOCE  buffers used  is specified by
      means of a PARM configuration  card, with parameters VTB N,
      N being  the number of  VTOCE buffers.  If no  such card is
      present  in the  configuration deck  the default  number of
      VTOCE buffers  is 30.  There  is no limit on  the number of
      VTOCE  buffers which  may be specified.   Refer to "Storage
      System  Enhancements"  below  for details  on  VTOCE buffer
      management.

K- 8. (10.1) Changed the format of the PRPH TAP config card.  The
      new format is:

      PRPH TAPn iom# channel# nchan model1 d1 {...model5 d5}

      Valid model numbers for tape drives are:

           0.        drive does not exist
           500.      MTU0500
           600.      MTU0600
           610.      MTU0610
           630.      MTU0630

      The old parameter "max" is  now specified in the RTDT.  The
      old "nsys" parameter is no longer available.

K- 9. (10.2)  The method  for determining  whether to  inform the
      operator about  discrepancies in the cpu  config card type,
      model, and cache size fields has been changed as follows:

      If the cpu  type, model, and cache size  fields are correct
      on  the  config  card  image  received  from  BOS,  then no
      operator message is displayed.

      If the cpu type, model, and  cache size fields exist on the
      config  card image  received from BOS,  but one  or more of
      these  fields  contains   incorrect  information,  then  an
      operator  message  is  displayed   on  the  system  console
      informing the operator of  the discrepancies.  These fields
      are then corrected for the  corresponding cpu card image in
      the config_deck segment.

      If the cpu type, model, and  cache size fields do not exist
      on  the  config  card  image  received  from  BOS,  then no
      operator message is displayed on the system console.  These
      fields are then added to  the corresponding cpu config card
      image maintained in the config_deck segment.









Contents of MR10.2             3-9                        SRB10.2


_T_u_n_i_n_g _P_a_r_a_m_e_t_e_r_s


L- 1. (10.1)     Added      the     new     realtime_io_priority,
      realtime_io_deadline,   and    realtime_io_quantum   tuning
      parameters   to  improve   throughput  of   tape  I/O-bound
      processes.  A  site may improve tape  throughput by setting
      realtime_io_priority to ON and  using the default values of
      realtime_io_deadline (0.   seconds) and realtime_io_quantum
      (0.005 seconds).

L- 2. (10.1)   Added   the   gv_integration   parameter   to  the
      change_tuning_parameters command to control the granularity
      of control  for work class governing.   The default setting
      retains the granularity used in prior releases.

L- 3. (10.1)  Added  the  -int_queue   control  argument  to  the
      tune_work_class   command  to   control  the   use  of  the
      interactive  scheduler queue  by users  in the  work class.
      The default values  are OFF for governed work  class and ON
      for all other work classes.

L- 4. (10.1) Changed  the default value of  the post_purge tuning
      parameter to OFF.


_S_t_o_r_a_g_e _S_y_s_t_e_m _E_n_h_a_n_c_e_m_e_n_t_s


M- 1. (10.0)  Changed the  Multics Storage System  to improve the
      reliability and availability of the system.  The changes in
      MR10.0 allow the system to recover quickly after almost all
      types  of crashes.   The quick  recovery is  implemented by
      software  which  maintains  storage  system  volumes  in  a
      consistent state at all times  and allows the site to defer
      volume salvaging operations to a site-scheduled maintenance
      period.  (Refer to Appendix D for details of the changes.)

M- 2. (10.0)  Changed  directory  control to  use  a multireader,
      single-writer  locking  strategy   for  directories.   This
      change improves performance by reducing the lock wait times
      for   directories.   Sites   experiencing  notify  timeouts
      waiting to lock >udd will no longer see this problem.

M- 3. (10.0) Eliminated the automatic  hierarchy salvage to depth
      two and three following a physical volume salvage of an RLV
      volume.   This  salvage  proved  ineffective  in  resolving
      hierarchy problems.







Contents of MR10.2            3-10                        SRB10.2


M- 4. (10.0)  Changed  the  rebuild_disk  command  to  reduce the
      number   of  VTOCEs   on  a   physical  volume.    This  is
      accomplished  by  truncating  the  VTOC  at  the  high  end
      (discarding VTOCEs  at the end of  the VTOC).  Before using
      rebuild_disk to  truncate a VTOC,  sweep_pv must be  run to
      vacate the portion of the VTOC being truncated.

M- 5. (10.0) Changed the salvagers to  no longer use the printer.
      Messages  which  may  be   important  to  immediate  system
      recovery are  displayed on the BOS  console while those not
      of immediate interest are placed in the syserr log.

M- 6. (10.0) Changed the Volume Retriever to delete the branch if
      an object cannot be successfully retrieved.

M- 7. (10.1) Provided  for the salvage of  physical volumes while
      they are online  and in use by the  system.  The salvage is
      completed  by  a  ring-0  function  called  Scavenger.  The
      Scavenger  performs all  of the  functions of  the Physical
      Volume Salvager.  The Scavenger is  invoked by the "x scav"
      operator command which creates a Daemon process to scavenge
      a specified  volume.  The Scavenger may  also be invoked by
      the scavenge_vol command in any process with hphcs_ access.
      The  "x scav"  and scavenge_vol commands  are documented in
      the MOH.

M- 8. (10.1)  Installed  the  ring-0  segment  scavenger_data  to
      implement a complex bookkeeping  protocol between a running
      Scavenger   and   Multics  Page   Control.   The   size  of
      scavenger_data  determines the  number of  Scavengers which
      may run simultaneously.  The segment contains a header of 1
      KW  in   size.   Each  additional   simultaneous  scavenger
      requires an additional 68KW.

      The default size  of scavenger_data is 70 KW  to allow only
      one Scavenger to run at a time.  The size of scavenger_data
      may be adjusted  by means of the SCAV  argument on the TBLS
      card which  is documented in the  MOH.  Increasing the size
      of  the scavenger_data  may require increasing  the size of
      the Hardcore Partition on root volumes.

      The   Scavenger   is  memory   intensive  and   the  memory
      requirements  listed above  represent the  amount of memory
      which  is  wired  while  the  Scavenger  is  running.   The
      Scavenger  runs  entirely in  ring-0 and  retains processor
      eligibility  for the  length of the  scavenge, usually 5-15
      minutes  per  physical volume.   Running the  Scavenger can
      adversely  affect interactive  users and  it is recommended
      that  the Scavenger  be run  during periods  of light load.
      Use of  the -nopt option is  recommended when the Scavenger
      is run  during periods of  heavier load.  Use  of the -nopt
      option causes the Scavenger to  take longer to complete but
      reduces the effect on other system users.


Contents of MR10.2            3-11                        SRB10.2


M- 9. (10.1) With  this release, the following  sizes of Hardcore
      Partitions are recommended:

      RPV = 2500 records

      non-RPV = 2500/N records, where N is the number of physical
      volumes containing Hardcore Partitions.

M-10. (10.1)  Redesigned VTOCE  buffer management  to improve the
      efficiency of VTOCE access.  More  wired memory is used for
      VTOCE  buffers  resulting  in considerable  savings  in the
      number  of  VTOCE I/Os.   Each  buffer is  large  enough to
      contain an  entire VTOCE (192 words).   The net increase in
      wired system  memory for VTOCE I/O  is 128 words multiplied
      by the number of VTOCE buffers used.

M-11. (10.1)  Changed the  vtoc_buffer_meters command  to provide
      information about  utilization of Volume  Table of Contents
      (VTOC) buffers.

M-12. (10.1) Protected the  File Map in the VTOCE  by providing a
      checksum.  The checksum is verified upon activation and the
      segment is  damaged if the  checksum is not  correct.  This
      action is  recorded in the  Syserr Log.  A  Physical Volume
      Scavenge corrects the situation should it occur.

M-13. (10.1)  Changed the  Volume Dumper  to discriminate between
      attach and open errors on  its output volume.  If an attach
      operation fails,  the user is  queried to retry  the attach
      operation.    If  the   user  answers  "no"   the  dump  is
      terminated.  If the user answers "yes" the attach operation
      is retried  with the same  volume.  The errors  on the open
      operation continue  to ask if the  volume should be deleted
      from the pool and if the dump should be continued.

M-14. (10.2)  Changed  the recover_volume_log  command  to accept
      multiple physical volume names  in a single invocation, and
      to  validate  the supplied  name(s) as  being members  of a
      registered logical volume on the system being recovered.
















Contents of MR10.2            3-12                        SRB10.2


M-15. (10.2)  Changed the  Volume Reloader to  allow reloading of
      multiple  physical volumes  in a  single invocation.  Users
      may now specify more that one PVNAME operand to the -pvname
      control  argument  and/or  have  multiple  -pvname  control
      arguments  to  the reload_volume  command.   When reloading
      more than  one physical volume in  a single invocation, the
      use of -disk_model and -no_detach are prohibited.

      An  implementation restriction  requires that  all physical
      volumes (with  the exception of the  RPV) be reloaded using
      the correct Volume Registration information.  Therefore, if
      an RPV and  other physical volumes are to  be reloaded, the
      reload  of  the  RPV   must  be  accomplished  first.   The
      remainder  of  the physical  volumes  may then  be reloaded
      together.  It is anticipated  that this restriction will be
      removed in a future release.

M-16. (10.2)  Changed  the   incremental_volume_dump  command  to
      accept  a  -detach control  argument  to specify  that dump
      volumes be detached after each pass.  Additionally, removed
      the  -no_detach  control   argument  to  the  (consolidated
      complete)_volume_dump commands.

M-17. (10.2)  Changed  the directory  locking strategy  to record
      read  locks  in the  dir_lock_seg.   This replaces  the old
      dirlockt_seg.

M-18. (10.2) Upgraded  the manage_volume_pool command  to support
      volume sets and expiration dates.   USE of this new version
      of  the command  IRREVOCABLY CHANGES  the structure  of the
      volume  pool   segment.   Type  "help   mvp"  for  detailed
      information.

M-19. (10.2) Changed the msf_manager_ entries that manipulate the
      access control  list on an  MSF to force access  to the MSF
      directory.   Programs  which  call  these  entries  will no
      longer have to force access themselves.

M-20. (10.2)  This release  provides limited  general support for
      segments of maximum length  256K words.  256K word segments
      are intended  for use only  for FORTRAN Very  Large Arrays.
      With  MR10.2,  any user  may  set the  maximum length  of a
      segment  to  256KW   by  calling  hcs_$set_max_length;  the
      set_max_length command  enforces a 255 KW  limit.  In order
      to connect to such a segment (i.e., successfully complete a
      segment  fault   on  the  segment),  the   user  must  call
      hcs_$set_256K_switch  or  use   the  new  process_switch_on
      command  to  allow use  of  256K segments  in  the process.
      General support for 256KW segments is limited to:  hardcore
      support and  hierarchy and volume  dumper/reloader support.
      In general,  commands and subroutines  may malfunction when
      attempting to reference the last page of a 256KW segment.



Contents of MR10.2            3-13                        SRB10.2


_A_n_s_w_e_r_i_n_g _S_e_r_v_i_c_e _a_n_d _S_y_s_t_e_m _A_d_m_i_n_i_s_t_r_a_t_i_o_n


N- 1. (10.0)  Changed  the  access  required  to  install  system
      tables.  Installation of the cdt, mgt, rtdt, and sat tables
      is  controlled by  the submitters'  effective access  to an
      access  control  segment,  <table_name>.install.acs.  These
      access control  segments MUST reside  in >system_control_1.
      This change allows site  personnel to restrict write access
      to the actual tables so  that persons authorized to install
      the tables cannot accidentally modify them.

N- 2. (10.0) Changed  the format of the  publicly accessible user
      table >sc1>whotab.   The change is effected  in a way which
      does  NOT require  the recompilation of  programs which use
      this table.  The  size of the table header  is increased by
      reserving  a  number  of  user entries  for  use  as header
      fields.   These  user  entries   are  logically  empty  and
      therefore  are   ignored  by  programs   which  honor  this
      convention.

N- 3. (10.0)  Added  warning controls  to the  Project Definition
      Table (PDT) which are triggered by user spending and cutoff
      dates in  addition to existing mechanisms  based on project
      spending  and  cutoff dates.   The  defaults, also  used by
      cv_pmf, are:  User_warn_days:   10; User_warn_percent:  10;
      User_warn_dollars:  10.

N- 4. (10.0) Changed  the master.ec segment in  >tools to use the
      new  qedx  control  arguments  -pathname  and  -no_rw_path.
      These   control  arguments   prevent  the   limited  system
      administrator from reading  and writing arbitrary segments.
      The  system  administrator   should  examine  the  supplied
      exec_com   and   update   the   site's   copy   located  in
      >udd>SysAdmin>admin>lib appropriately.

N- 5. (10.1)  Renamed  the  admin  subroutine  to  admin_.   This
      subroutine  processes many  operator commands.   Sites that
      have exec_coms (such as system_start_up.ec, admin.ec, etc.)
      that contain commands of  the form "admin$xxx" MUST replace
      them with commands of the form "sc_command xxx".

N- 6. (10.1) Installed a new version  of the Answering Service to
      redisplay the  login banner when the  banner changes (e.g.,
      going  from  special session  to  standard service)  and to
      display  the  channel name  in the  login banner.   The new
      version also adds per-user default login ring specification
      in  the  PDT,  and  changes  create_homedir_  to  set  ring
      brackets to 7,7.






Contents of MR10.2            3-14                        SRB10.2


N- 7. (10.1) Changed  Answering Service to allow  access to login
      channels to  be restricted, using  Access Control Segments.
      Following an unsuccessful attempt to use a restricted line,
      the line  is hungup rather than  allowing repeated attempts
      to login or allowing the normal timeout interval.

N- 8. (10.1)  Changed  the adddev  command  to correctly  set the
      characteristics  of a  tape drive which  was offline during
      system initialization.

N- 9. (10.1)  Changed  the cv_cmf,  cv_pmf, cv_rtmf,  cv_smf, and
      cv_ttf   translators   to  process   segments   having  the
      appropriate  suffix.   The respective  suffixes  are:  cmf,
      pmf, rtmf,  smf, and ttf.   The cv_XXX command  first looks
      for the  segment source.XXX, and  if found, the  segment is
      translated  and  the output  placed in  source.TABLE, where
      TABLE is the appropriate suffix.   If the source segment is
      not found,  the command looks  for the segment  source.  If
      found,  a  warning message  is  issued and  the  segment is
      converted as with prior  releases.  This compatibility will
      be  removed  in a  future release.   Project administrators
      should   rename  their   PMF  segments  or   add  the  name
      <Project>.pmf to  existing segments so there  is no need to
      change typing habits or exec_coms.

N-10. (10.1)  Changed  the  cv_pmf, cv_cmf,  cv_ttf,  cv_smf, and
      cv_rtmf  translators   to  accept  the   -severity  control
      argument.  Also provided each with severity active function
      support.

N-11. (10.1)  Changed  the  cv_cmf, cv_pmf,  cv_rtmf,  and cv_ttf
      translators  to no  longer delete  the output  segment just
      because translation failed.  Users  should use the severity
      active  function  to  determine whether  a  translation was
      successful.

N-12. (10.1)  Added  the   -no_password_info  and  -password_info
      control   arguments   to   the   print_pnt   command.   The
      -password_info  control  argument   is  the  default.   The
      control  arguments  determine   whether  information  about
      good/bad  passwords  and  the  date of  password  change is
      displayed or suppressed.

N-13. (10.1)  Installed  the   set_mc_message_limits  command  to
      control the display of messages by the message coordinator.










Contents of MR10.2            3-15                        SRB10.2


N-14. (10.1)  Changed  the  method   of  storing  the  admin-mode
      password.  The password is stored in >sc1>communications as
      a  char (8)  value.   Prior  to MR10.1,  it  was  stored in
      directly readable  form.  The first time  MR10.1 is booted,
      the     find_communications_seg_     subroutine    converts
      >sc1>communications  from  version  1 to  version  2.  This
      change  consists  entirely of  scrambling the  password and
      changing the version number.  If  it is necessary to revert
      to MR10.0,  precautions must be taken  to ensure entry into
      admin  mode.   This  can be  accomplished  by:  temporarily
      adding an entry to admin.ec such as:

          &label execute
          &rf1
          &quit

      This enables  entering commands in  admin mode even  if the
      admin command  cannot be used and  allows emergency repairs
      (e.g.,   "x   execute   rename   perm_syserr_log   =.bad").
      Alternatively, a  copy of >sc1>communications  must be made
      before booting MR10.1 and  restore that copy before booting
      MR10.0.  The password  is at locations zero and  one (0 and
      1); the version is at location 12 (twelve, octal).

N-15. (10.2) Changed pre_empt sampling to no longer cause serious
      performance  degradations on  one or two  CPU systems.  The
      default value may now be used for such configurations.

N-16. (10.2)  Removed the  salv entry  of the  admin.ec since the
      command  it   uses  (copy_salvager_output)  is   no  longer
      available.

N-17. (10.2) Changed  the Daemon logout, via  the operator logout
      command, to  use the trm_ subroutine  protocol.  This means
      the daemon epilogue handler, if  any, is invoked, as is the
      case for all other process terminations or logouts.



















Contents of MR10.2            3-16                        SRB10.2


_P_r_o_c_e_s_s _E_n_v_i_r_o_n_m_e_n_t


O- 1. (10.0)   Changed   ipc_$block  (actually   fast_hc_ipc)  to
      truncate the user-ring stack in certain situations prior to
      blocking the  process.  The stack is  truncated to the page
      after  the  current  stack_end_ptr.   This  change improves
      performance  by avoiding  disk writes for  pages beyond the
      last stack frame.

      Note  that  this change  may expose  some coding  errors in
      users' programs that had not been evident in the past.  For
      example,  a FORTRAN  program which is  incorrectly coded to
      depend  upon  an  automatic  variable  retaining  its value
      across subroutine calls now  fails.  In prior releases, the
      program might  have executed without apparent  error if the
      subroutine's stack frame were  located at the same position
      on the stack.

O- 2. (10.0)   Changed   handling   of   the   storage  condition
      (out_of_bounds  on  the  user's stack)  to  provide clearer
      diagnostic messages.  The storage  condition is raised only
      when the stack is truly exhausted.  An attempt to reference
      beyond the end  of the last stack frame  is signalled as an
      out_of_bounds condition.

O- 3. (10.0) Changed  the calling sequence of  sub_err_ to take a
      flag word  of bits rather  than single character  flags for
      action  codes.  For  compatibility, sub_err_  still accepts
      the old character flags.

O- 4. (10.1)  Removed  support   for  v1pl1.   The  pl1_operators
      operator segment  for programs compiled with  the Version 1
      PL/1 compiler  will be moved to  >obsolete in MR10.2.  User
      programs which have not been  compiled since 1972 should be
      recompiled.

O- 5. (10.1) Changed the pl1_operators_ subroutine to support the
      use  of profile  for object segments  with separate static.
      Removed references to nonexistent pl1 io entry points.

O- 6. (10.1)  Changed  the link_trap_caller_  subroutine  to call
      trap procedures with  a null pointer for a  0 arg link relp
      rather than a pointer to the base of the linkage section.

O- 7. (10.1)  Changed  timer_manager_  to   be  able  to  pass  a
      caller-supplied  data pointer  to programs  which handle an
      alarm_ or cpu-call.







Contents of MR10.2            3-17                        SRB10.2


O- 8. (10.1)  Added  the  feature   of  invoking  a  reconnection
      exec_com, reconnect.ec,  to tailor the  process environment
      when   connecting   to   a   disconnected   process.   Upon
      reconnection,  the  handler for  the  reconnection searches
      first in the user's home directory, then the user's project
      directory,  and  finally  in  >system_control_dir  for  the
      exec_com.   If found,  the exec_com  is invoked  to perform
      reconnection funtions such as resetting terminal modes.

O- 9. (10.1)     Installed     the     reconnect_ec_enable    and
      reconnect_ec_disable commands to search, or not search, for
      the reconnection exec_com.  The reconnect_ec_enable command
      is   in    effect   by   default    for   processes   using
      process_overseer_ or project_start_up_ overseers.

O-10. (10.2)  Installed  PL/1  Release  28d which  is  a complete
      compiler  installation.  Several  new features  were added.
      Type "help pl1.new_features" for complete details.

O-11. (10.2) Changed the abbreviation  processor to recognize the
      archive  component  pathname  delimiter  (::)  as  a  break
      sequence.   As  a  consequence  of this  change,  abbrev no
      longer  expands  any  abbreviation  whose  name  contains a
      double colon.  Added the .rename request to abbrev to allow
      users to rename any such  abbreviations so they are able to
      continue to use them.


_O_p_e_r_a_t_o_r _C_o_n_s_o_l_e _S_u_p_p_o_r_t


P- 1. (10.0) Changed the operator  console management software to
      improve  operation.   Some  of  these  changes  affect  the
      appearance  of output  on the  console.  For  example, some
      prompting  messages are  no longer  followed by  a carriage
      return  (i.e.,  the  cursor  remains  positioned  after the
      prompt).   Nonprinting characters  are translated  to octal
      escape sequences (e.g., \034).

P- 2. (10.1)  Changed the  algorithm used  to compress successive
      identical  syserr  messages  to  the  string  "=".   If the
      console beeper is activated by the message, the compression
      does not take place.












Contents of MR10.2            3-18                        SRB10.2


P- 3. (10.2)  Installed  a new  operator console  support package
      that  offers  dynamic console  recovery in  console failure
      situations.   The  new  software  requires  that  the  site
      replace the PRPH OPC card with the following card:

           PRPH OPC<tag> IOM CHNL MODEL LINE_LENG STATE

      One card  should be inserted into  the config_deck for each
      configured console.  The state field may contain one of the
      following  values:   ON  for  the  single,  in  use, system
      console; OFF to specify an  existing console that is not to
      be used as an alternate  console; INOP to specify a console
      known  to be  broken and  is normally  assigned dynamically
      during  console recovery;  and ALT for  a console available
      for use if the primary  console fails.  For a more detailed
      discussion  see  Section  4   of  the  MR10.2  Installation
      Instructions.

P- 4. (10.2)  Modified  the  ocdcm_  console DIM  to  display the
      string  "(output discarded)"  at the beginning  of the next
      line  after  an operator  has  discarded the  output  of an
      operator entered  request, to provide  a visible indication
      that such an event has occurred.  The console then responds
      with  the  next READ,  indicated by  the prompt  on CSU6601
      consoles, or the INPUT light on CSU6000 series consoles.

P- 5. (10.2)  Provided  a new  PARM  to control  console software
      actions in the event of console recovery failure.  The CCRF
      field  on the  parm card  can be  used to  specify that the
      system should crash if console recovery is unable to locate
      a working alternate console  and the Message Coordinator is
      not in use.  Consult the Multics Operators' Handbook, Order
      Number AM81, for more details.

      Site  maintainers  should be  aware  that if  the  Crash on
      Console Recovery  Failure option has  been selected, either
      by presence  of the CCRF parameter  on the config_file PARM
      card or the usage of the set_system_console -crash, and the
      bootload console is deconfigured via the set_system_console
      command Multics will crash with the message:

           ocdcm_  (reconfigure):  Bootload  console deconfigured
      with CCRF set.

      This   command   is   documented   in   MAM   AK50,  System
      Administration.  See that manual for more details.









Contents of MR10.2            3-19                        SRB10.2


P- 6. (10.2) Although  it is possible  to specify a  console line
      length, care  should be taken with  line lengths of greater
      than  80  characters  when  utilizing  the  CSU6601  series
      consoles.  It is possible that line lengths of more than 80
      characters may  cause buffer overflow.   Repeated overflows
      will result  in the console  being marked INOP  and removed
      from service.  If  the site suspects this to  be a problem,
      the console may be brought back  on line through use of the
      set_system_console command.


_O_t_h_e_r _S_u_p_e_r_v_i_s_o_r _C_h_a_n_g_e_s


Q- 1. (10.1)  Moved  the core  map  from SST  to a  segment named
      core_map.  Deleted the check_sst command.

Q- 2. (10.1) Split  the bound_command_loop bound  segment, moving
      modules not used during cold  boot to the online libraries.
      Also  moved  some  stand-alone  modules  in  >sl1  to bound
      segments.


_C_O_M_M_U_N_I_C_A_T_I_O_N_S


_F_N_P _S_o_f_t_w_a_r_e


R- 1. (10.0 and  10.1) Changed the  Multics Communications System
      (CS)  to support  connection to a  packet switching network
      through  an   interface  complying  with   the  1980  CCITT
      Recommendation X.25.  This includes  the X.28, X.29 and X.3
      protocols.  The hardware connection  for an X.25 network is
      made through a single HDLC channel.

      The following new features were added to the X.25 software:

     ox    When  calling  a  Multics  system  using  X.25,  it  is
          possible to select a channel service type (either login
          or  slave)  by using  the call-data  field of  the call
          request packet.

     ox    The X.25 software provides full CS metering functions.

     ox    The X.25  software is certified for  operation with the
          TYMNET network.

      For details on  the use of the X.25  protocol, refer to MAM
      Communications (Order No.  CC75).





Contents of MR10.2            3-20                        SRB10.2


R- 2. (10.0) Changed FNP software to improve its efficiency.  The
      change  allows  FNP throughput  rates  of more  than 10,000
      characters  per second  per FNP using  Bisync protocol, and
      more  than  20,000  characters  per  second  per  FNP using
      X.25/LAP protocols.

R- 3. (10.0) Changed FNP software to  support data rates of up to
      72K bits per  second for synchronous lines and  up to 19.2K
      bits per second for asynchronous lines.

R- 4. (10.1) Froze  software support for the  Datanet 355 (DN6632
      models)  at the  MR10.0 level.   New FNP  features are only
      available  on  the  Datanet  series 6678  FNPs  (DN6651 and
      DN6661)  having at  least 64K words  of FNP  memory.  A new
      system  library,  >ldd>355,  with a  parallel  structure to
      >ldd>mcs, contains versions of all FNP modules which run on
      the DN6632 and on DN6678 models with less than 64K words of
      memory.

R- 5. (10.1)  Changed  the FNP  software  to allocate  buffers at
      addresses above 32K words.  This change allows use of up to
      256K words of  memory, the full complement.  On  a 64K word
      FNP, it  is no longer  advisable to use a  very large trace
      buffer,  since the  space thus occupied  would otherwise be
      available for the buffer pool.   A size of approximately 4K
      to  6K  words is  recommended, depending  on the  number of
      channels configured.

R- 6. (10.1) Changed  FNP software to allow  the configuration of
      the FNP DIA on any of the FNP  IOM channels 3, 4 , 5, or 14
      (octal).   The FNP  can only  be accessed  by one  of these
      channels on  a given Multics System.   However, the FNP can
      be cabled  into several different Multics  systems (e.g., a
      production  system  and a  test  system) using  a different
      channel for  each system providing that  only one system is
      using the FNP at a  time.  Sites were previously restricted
      to using only channel 4.

R- 7. (10.1)   Changed   some   internal   interfaces   used   by
      multiplexers to allow the  recovery of masked FNP channels.
      Sites  that use  site-supplied multiplexers  are advised to
      see the detailed discussion of changes in Appendix E.

R- 8. (10.1)  Installed  an  MCS  timer facility  for  ring-0 MCS
      multiplexers.  Entrypoints  to mcs_timer are  documented in
      the  Communication  System  SDN,  Order  Number  AN85.  The
      x25_mpx contains an example of mcs_timer use.








Contents of MR10.2            3-21                        SRB10.2


R- 9. (10.2) Added  the collect parameter  to the additional_info
      field of the terminal  type definition for X.25 multiplexer
      channels.    If  the   parameter  is  set   to  "yes",  the
      non-default   value,   outgoing  call   requests   made  on
      subchannels for  that channel specify  the reverse charging
      user facility.   This results in  charging the call  to the
      host being called, rather than the caller.

R-10. (10.2) Certified level 2 and  level 3 Multics X.25 software
      with TELENET.

R-11. (10.2) Certified level 2 and  level 3 Multics X.25 software
      with UNINET.

R-12. (10.2)   Added  the   packet_threshold  parameter   to  the
      additional_info field  of the terminal  type definition for
      X.25 multiplexer  channels.  If the  parameter is set  to a
      non-default  value,  the multiplexer  will not  send output
      packets  with a  length of packet_threshold,  or longer, if
      there  are  any shorter  packets  queued for  output.  Also
      added  the set_x25_packet_threshold  administrative command
      to  allow  the  value  of   this  parameter  to  be  varied
      dynamically on a per-multiplexer  basis.  The current value
      of the parameter  can be obtained by means  of the tty_dump
      command.  The purpose of this  parameter is to optimize the
      processing  of  short  packets,  in  an  environment  where
      individual characters  are being echoed over  a network and
      lengthy delays interfere with input.


_C_D_T _C_h_a_n_g_e_s


S- 1. (10.0) Changed the  CDT to allow baud rates  of up to 72000
      for synchronous channels (Bisync and HDLC protocols) and up
      to 19200 for asynchronous channels.



















Contents of MR10.2            3-22                        SRB10.2


S- 2. (10.0) Changed the  CDT to include a permanent  tree of the
      multiplexer  hierarchy.  This  allows multiplexers  to load
      more  quickly  because  the  tree   does  not  have  to  be
      reconstructed   during  the   loading  operation.   Quicker
      loading speeds up answering service initialization.

      As part of this change, the answering service automatically
      checks    the   consistency    of   CDT    entries   during
      initialization.  If an inconsistency  is found, messages to
      the console indicate:  the  existence of the inconsistency;
      the  channels   deleted  or  added   during  the  resultant
      salvaging  of  the CDT;  and  completion of  CDT salvaging.
      Note that when the damaged switch  is found ON for the CDT,
      salvaging     occurs     automatically     during    system
      initialization.   Therefore,  site  procedures  should  not
      routinely turn off this  switch until the answering service
      is completely initialized.


_T_T_F _C_h_a_n_g_e_s


T- 1. (10.0) Modified most terminal type definitions to include a
      can_type  mode  specification   of  can_type=overstrike  or
      can_type=replace.  Added can_type=replace  mode to the mode
      string in  the TTF entry  for those terminals  that replace
      overstruck characters.

T- 2. (10.0)    Added    new    terminal    types:     BANTAM550,
      DIABLO1640_OSR_10C6L_CONSOLE,            NEC5525_OSR_OFLOW,
      TI940_80C_OFLOW, TI940_132C_OFLOW, and TVI912

T- 3. (10.0)   Added   terminal   types:    DG132A,   DG132A_60L,
      DG132A_120L, DG132B, DG132B_60L,  and DG132_120L supporting
      the Datagraphix 132 terminal.  The DG132A terminal types do
      not have function keys while the DG132B terminal types have
      function keys.

T- 4. (10.0) Added  terminal types:  H19 and  Z19 as synonyms for
      the HEATH19.

T- 5. (10.0)    Added   terminal    types:    LAP_DTE,   LAP_DCE,
      LAP_TELENET,  X25_DATAPAC,   X25_TYMNET,  X25_TELENET,  and
      X25_TRANSPAC supporting X.25 multiplexer connections.

T- 6. (10.0) Added video tables to the AJ510 terminal type.

T- 7. (10.0)  Added function  key specifications  for the TVI940,
      TVI950, VT100, VT100_OFLOW,  VT100W, VT100W_OFLOW, VT100WS,
      VT132, VT132_OFLOW, VT132_80C, and VT132_80C_OFLOW terminal
      types.




Contents of MR10.2            3-23                        SRB10.2


T- 8. (10.1) Changed the TTF to include additional terminal types
      and  made  enhancements to  several others  terminal types.
      The new terminal types are:

           ADM1                          NL7009
           ASCII_PRINTER_OSR             SUPERBRAIN
           BITGRAPH                      TDV2220
           DTC300S_12C

      Added  support  for  four  Hewlett-Packard  Model  26xx CRT
      terminal  types (HP2621,  HP2622, HP2623,  and HP2648).  No
      distinction  is made  among these  types in  the TTF (i.e.,
      they are treated identically).

      Changed the  VIP7205 entry to include  an appropriate modes
      statement.

      Corrected  the  initial string  for  the DTC300S  which was
      setting 15 tabs.

      Removed  the  LAP  terminal  types  LAP_DCE,  LAP_DTE,  and
      LAP_TELENET since the  LAP level support of the  X.25 is in
      the FNP.

      Changed the initial string for the INFOTON100 terminal type
      entry.





























Contents of MR10.2            3-24                        SRB10.2


T- 9. (10.2)  Added  ten  new   terminal  types,  and  seven  new
      answerbacks  and  other enhancements  to TTF.ttf.   The new
      terminal types are:

      LA120_12C6L
           Digital Equipment LA120 DECwriter  III as line printer
           at 12 chars/inch, 6 lines/inch.
      TI787
           Texas Instruments Model 787.
      VIP7201
           Honeywell VIP 7201.
      VT100S
           Digital Equipment Model VT-100  (24 lines, 80 columns)
           without advanced video.
      VT102, VT102_80C
           Digital Equipment Model VT-102 using 80 columns.
      VT102_OFLOW, VT102_80C_OFLOW
           Same as VT102 but with output flow control enabled.
      VT102_132C
           Same as VT102 but configured with 132 columns.
      VT102_132C_OFLOW
           Same  as  VT102_132C  but  with  output  flow  control
           enabled.

      The seven added answerbacks are:

                XTI787              for       TI787
                XVT100S             for       VT100S
                XVT102_80C          for       VT102_80C
                XVT102_80C_O        for       VT102_80C_OFLOW
                XVT102_132C         for       VT102_132C
                XVT102_132C_O       for       VT102_132C_OFLOW
                7201                for       VIP7201


_C_o_m_m_u_n_i_c_a_t_i_o_n_s _M_e_t_e_r_i_n_g


U- 1. (10.0)  Changed  the  bind_fnp  command  to  check  for the
      presence of meters module if metering is enabled by default
      or if  the "meter:  yes"  statement is present  in the bind
      file.  If metering is enabled and the meters module absent,
      then binding fails.

U- 2. (10.0) Added an  idle loop to the FNP  scheduler to allow a
      more  complete metering  of FNP  idle time.   Installed the
      meter_fnp_idle and display_fnp_idle  commands to record FNP
      idle time at specifiable  intervals and display accumulated
      data.

U- 3. (10.0)  Added the  trace_mcs command  to display  MCS trace
      table entries and control the MCS tracing facility.



Contents of MR10.2            3-25                        SRB10.2


_O_t_h_e_r _C_o_m_m_u_n_i_c_a_t_i_o_n _E_n_h_a_n_c_e_m_e_n_t_s


V- 1. (10.0 and 10.1)  Fixed bugs in CS output  flow control that
      caused  terminal output  for user A  to appear  on user B's
      terminal.

V- 2. (10.1)   Installed  bound_as_mpx_   and  bound_comm_meters_
      subroutines to provide X.25  support.  The support includes
      implementation of LAPB protocol and the handling of all I/O
      buffering in the FNP.


_O_N_L_I_N_E _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E


_A_c_c_e_s_s_i_n_g _t_h_e _S_y_s_t_e_m


W- 1. (10.0)  Changed  the  enter,  enterp  and  login  preaccess
      requests   to  recognize   the  -arguments   (-ag)  control
      argument.   The  -ag  control  argument  must  be  the last
      control  argument  to  access  requests  as  all  arguments
      following it are taken as  arguments to the process.  Added
      the login_args command/active function to display or return
      information about  selected login arguments.   Refer to the
      MPM Commands (Order No.  AG92) for more information.

W- 2. (10.0) Added the -long (-lg) and -warning control arguments
      to the  login preaccess request.  The  -lg control argument
      reverses  the effect  of -brief  and -warning  reverses the
      effect of -no_warning.

W- 3. (10.0)  Changed  the  processing  of  interactive  and card
      passwords to  define a legal password  as being one through
      eight  characters.   A  character  may  be  printing  ASCII
      graphic   except  space   and  semi-colon.    Backspace  is
      permitted  and   counts  as  one   character.   Users  with
      passwords longer than eight  characters are warned at login
      that  some characters  in their password  are ignored.  The
      warning  message can  be avoided  by typing  only the first
      eight password characters.

W- 4. (10.0) The Answering Service no longer creates missing home
      directories  when  a  user  logs  in.   If  a  user's  home
      directory is deleted or  missing, the Project Administrator
      must create the directory.  The Answering Service continues
      to create home directories when a  user is added to the PDT
      for a project.






Contents of MR10.2            3-26                        SRB10.2


W- 5. (10.2)  Changed the  request for  password during  login to
      notify the user when it is  safe to type the password.  The
      dialup_  subroutine  displays  the  password  prompt before
      masking   the  terminal.    Terminals  which   support  the
      printer_off  order  are  masked  prior  to  display  of the
      new_line.   Terminals which  do not support  this order are
      masked simultaneously with  the transmitted new_line (i.e.,
      as a single group of characters).


_A_r_c_h_i_v_e _P_a_t_h_n_a_m_e _S_u_p_p_o_r_t


X- 1. (10.0)  Changed  the  contents  active  function  to accept
      archive pathnames.

X- 2. (10.0)  Changed  the   print_link_info  command  to  accept
      archive pathnames.

X- 3. (10.0)  Changed  the pathname  manipulation commands/active
      functions (path, directory,  entry, strip, strip_entry, and
      equal_name) to recognize archive pathnames.

X- 4. (10.0)  Changed  the path  command/active function  to take
      optional  second  and third  arguments  to form  an archive
      pathname.   When  the  optional arguments  are  given, they
      specify the directory, entryname,  and component name parts
      of an archive pathname.

X- 5. (10.0)    Added    the   component    and   strip_component
      commands/active  functions   to  operate  on   the  archive
      component  name portion  of the  pathname analogous  to the
      operation  of  entry  and   strip_entry  on  the  entryname
      portion.  The operation of component and strip_component is
      identical  to  that  of  entry and  strip_entry  when their
      argument is not an archive pathname.

X- 6. (10.0)   Added  the   is_component_pathname  command/active
      function which returns true if  the pathname argument is an
      archive component pathname.

X- 7. (10.0) Added the  entry_path command/active function which,
      when  given  an  archive  pathname,  returns  the  absolute
      pathname  of  the  archive  (i.e., it  removes  the archive
      component name from the archive pathname).


_M_e_t_e_r_i_n_g _T_o_o_l_s


Y- 1. (10.0)  Enhanced  the  meter_rcp command  to  accept device
      names and resource types of up to 32 characters in length.



Contents of MR10.2            3-27                        SRB10.2


Y- 2. (10.0) Added the hc_pf_meters command to display the number
      of page faults taken on hardcore segments.

Y- 3. (10.0) Added an  idle loop to the FNP  scheduler to allow a
      more  complete metering  of FNP  idle time.   Installed the
      meter_fnp_idle and display_fnp_idle  commands to record FNP
      idle time at specifiable  intervals and display accumulated
      data.

Y- 4. (10.0)  Added the  trace_mcs command  to display  MCS trace
      table entries and control the MCS tracing facility.

Y- 5. (10.1)  Added  the  vtoc_buffer_meters  command  to provide
      information about  utilization of Volume  Table of Contents
      (VTOC) buffers.

Y- 6. (10.2) Changed  the trace command to  produce more accurate
      meters.  Meters  produced by the MR10.2  command may not be
      compared  to  meters for  the same  script reported  by the
      trace_meters command in prior  releases.  The TOTAL line of
      the  trace_meters report  should be  about the  same as the
      ready line after running the same script without metering.

      Changed the  structure of the trace  table to provide fixed
      bin (53) fields for real time and vcpu time accumulators in
      order to remove the 19 hour restriction.  Private copies of
      trace  or  the  trace_meters   command  must  be  upgraded.
      Documentation of trace, at one  time, showed how to replace
      trace_print_ with  a private tracing  procedure.  If anyone
      uses  this  feature, it  will  be necessary  to  modify the
      tracing procedure.

      Added   the  LVCPU/CALL   field  to   the  format   of  the
      trace_meters   report  to   give  the   average  number  of
      microseconds, per  call, of virtual cpu  time spent in each
      procedure.   Columns  previously  headed with  CPU  are now
      headed VCPU,  and columns previously headed  with PWS (page
      waits) are now headed PF (page faults).


_O_n_l_i_n_e _T_e_s_t_i_n_g


Z- 1. (10.0) Added the -pathname  control argument to the extract
      command to allow the user  to specify an optional directory
      in which to find online  FDUMPS.  FDUMPS are kept in >dumps
      by default.

Z- 2. (10.1) Added a  version of MCLT to support  256K FNP memory
      management.





Contents of MR10.2            3-28                        SRB10.2


Z- 3. (10.1) Added three new MOLT's  test requests:  mtg for tape
      shotgun,  mtc  for  tape  compatability, and  mdc  for disk
      confidence.   The  requests  are  entered  in  the standard
      MOLT's  format with  the test id  being mtgICCDD, mtcICCDD,
      and mdcICCDD where I is the  iom, CC is the channel, and DD
      is the device.

      NOTE:   Running MOLTS  MDRs on  any device  connected to an
      EURC  affects operation  of other devices  connected to it.
      Consequences  of operating  the other  devices vary between
      devices  (e.g.,  VFU image  may  be affected  for printers,
      ioi_timer  messages, garbaged  printouts, bad  data on card
      input, etc.).

Z- 4. (10.1) Installed the display_cpu_error  command to scan the
      syserr  log  and  display  machine  conditions  and history
      registers.

Z- 5. (10.2)   Added  the   -patches  control   argument  to  the
      load_tandd_library  command  to allow  for reading  of IFAD
      tapes  that contain  patches that  might have  records with
      ZERO checksums.

Z- 6. (10.2)  Installed the  analyze_multics command  to invoke a
      subsystem  that permits  the scanning of  a Multics address
      space  for  analysis.  The  dumps  search list  is  used to
      locate  FDUMPs.   If  a  dumps search  list  is  not found,
      analyze_multics will use only >dumps  in the search list as
      the  default.  If  additional search paths  are desired the
      add_search_paths command must be used to define them.

























Contents of MR10.2            3-29                        SRB10.2


Z- 7. (10.2) Changed  TOLTS to allow  a user to  communicate with
      the operator via the msg request.  If the message ends with
      a "?"  the  operator is prompted to reply.   If the message
      does not end with a "?"  it is simply a message sent to the
      operator console.

      Modified TOLTS  to allow displaying  partial configuration.
      If  the  request 'test  pcd'  is requested  from  a process
      running  polts,  only  those   devices  running  polts  are
      displayed.  If the request 'test  pcd dsk' is entered, then
      the entire disk config is  displayed.  If the request 'test
      pcd  tapa'  is  entered,  then  only  tapa  config  info is
      displayed.

      Modified  TOLTS_  to  allow  MDR testing  of  non-logical 0
      channels.   This  will  permit  MDR testing  of  any device
      through any connected channel.

      Modified  Tolts  to  check  access  to >sc1>opr_query_data,
      >sc1>cdt, >sc1>rcp>tandd.acs,  >sl1>phcs_, and >sl1>tandd_.
      If  the  user  lacks  access, tolts  will  return  an error
      message and wrap-up

      Modified  isolts to  accept the  -type control  argument to
      display_error at request level.


_P_r_o_b_e

      (10.0)  Installed  probe  version 5.4,  which  includes the
      following changes.

a- 1. (10.0)  Changed  the  probe  position and  use  requests to
      accept a qedx regular  expression surrounded by slashes (/)
      as an  alternative to the quoted  string argument.  Changed
      the  before  and after  requests  to accept  both  the qedx
      regular expression  and quoted string and  to set breaks at
      all matches.

a- 2. (10.0)  Added the  object request  to probe  to display the
      assembly instructions comprising the current source line or
      a   specified  number   of  source   lines.   The  assembly
      instructions are displayed in a format similar to that used
      by debug.

a- 3. (10.0) Changed the args request in probe to take an integer
      argument  specifying the  frame number  to use  rather than
      defaulting to  the current frame,  and to take  a procedure
      name and use the last  frame for that procedure.  Added the
      long name arguments to the args request.





Contents of MR10.2            3-30                        SRB10.2


a- 4. (10.0)      Added      the      -handle_conditions      and
      -no_handle_conditions   control  arguments   to  the  probe
      command.   These  control  arguments   allow  the  user  to
      determine whether probe handles all conditions and displays
      an appropriate message or allows faults.

a- 5. (10.0)  Added  the handlers  request to  probe to  list the
      condition  handlers  active  in  the  current  frame  or  a
      specified frame.

a- 6. (10.0) Added the "ptr unaligned"  type to the probe declare
      request to allow the user to declare packed pointers.

a- 7. (10.2) Changed probe  to use the probe search  list to find
      source  segments,  and  to  print arrays  and  strings with
      compression of similar array elements of substrings.


_S_y_s_t_e_m _P_r_o_g_r_a_m_m_i_n_g _a_n_d _L_i_b_r_a_r_y _M_a_i_n_t_e_n_a_n_c_e


b- 1. (10.0)   Moved   all   >ldd>include_2   include   files  to
      >ldd>include to provide an easier and more efficient search
      method,  and  changed  the  system  default  for translator
      search paths accordingly.

      NOTE:   Users  are  advised to  remove  >ldd>include_2 from
      their  translator  search  paths.  The  system  default for
      translator search paths has been changed accordingly.

b- 2. (10.0) Added the peruse_crossref (pcref) command to examine
      the output  from the cross_reference  command.  By default,
      peruse_crossref  references cross_reference  output for the
      Multics  system.    This  output  is   distributed  in  the
      >ldd>crossref directory.

b- 3. (10.0)  Changed  the output  format of  the cross_reference
      command  to  include the  language suffixes  of referencing
      modules as an aid in locating them.

b- 4. (10.0) Changed the default action of the dump_vtoce command
      to brief.  The output consists of interpreted contents of a
      VTOCE.  The -long control argument  must be used when octal
      output is desired.

b- 5. (10.0)  Changed the  print_configuration_deck (pcd) command
      to interpret a binary -1 as a proper time zone offset value
      in CLOK card rather than as a null field.  The capabilities
      of  the  pcd command  are expanded  significantly, allowing
      more  flexibility  in selection  of configuration  cards to
      display.  Refer to the  System Programming Tools (Order No.
      AZ03) for details of the new features.



Contents of MR10.2            3-31                        SRB10.2


b- 6. (10.0) Installed  compare_configuration_deck as a  tool for
      maintenance of configuration files.

b- 7. (10.0)  Changed  the copy_dump_tape  command to  allow user
      specified  names  for  a  dump map.   Naming  dump  maps is
      allowed  by  new  functionality  of  the  -map  and -select
      control arguments.   The default naming is  a unique string
      with the suffix .map.

b- 8. (10.0) Changed the get_library_segment command to no longer
      search >ldd>auth_maint by default.   Sites that have a need
      for such  a directory should  not delete the  links in >ldd
      for auth_maint.control and should retain the control files.
      Sites    that    do    not   have    a    directory   named
      >documentation>iml_info_segments  are encouraged  to create
      the directory  and use it for  site specific info segments.
      The  existance of  this directory is  known by  many of the
      standard library commands.

b- 9. (10.0) Added the -page_offset  (-pgofs) control argument to
      the  print_bind_map command  to display the  page number of
      the first word of the text  section of each component as an
      octal number.   If the component crosses  at least one page
      boundary a plus (+) character follows the page number.

b-10. (10.0) Added  the signal command  (replaces signal_$signal)
      to  allow the  user to  test signalling  of conditions from
      command  level.   This   command  provides  improved  error
      detection and its control arguments specify information for
      the condition_info_ header.

b-11. (10.0)  Replaced the  dump_cdt command  with display_cdt to
      display information in the CDT.

b-12. (10.0)  Changed  the tape_ibm_  subroutine to  increase the
      maximum legal block size from 8192 to 32760 bytes, which is
      the  maximum  specified  in  the  IBM  tape  standard.  The
      default block size remains  8192.  No special permission is
      required to use  large block sizes up to  12288 bytes.  For
      blocks    larger    than    12288    bytes,    access    to
      >sc1>rcp>workspace.acs or the rcp_sys_ gate is required.

      Changed  the  tape_ibm_  subroutine to  accept  IBM encoded
      density  in  the HDR2  record which  are blank  or invalid,
      rather  than aborting  with an error  message.  The current
      density setting is used  instead.  The tape_ibm_ subroutine
      still encodes this field correctly on output.

b-13. (10.1) Changed  incompatibly the format of  the MST header.
      To make a system tape using the new header you MUST use the
      new generate_mst command.  The new generator can be used to
      generate tapes for preceeding  releases of both Multics and
      BOS.


Contents of MR10.2            3-32                        SRB10.2


b-14. (10.1) Enhanced the check_mst  command to detect and report
      overflows  of the  hardcore linkage  segments, definitions,
      and  name table.   The enhanced  check_mst command  MUST be
      used  to  check tapes  prepared  with the  new generate_mst
      command and  may NOT be  used to check  tapes prepared with
      previous releases.   The enhanced check_mst  displays error
      messages  on  error_output  and sets  a  severity indicator
      (accessed  by the  severity active  function).  Removed the
      addname  ckm   from  the  check_mst   tool.   The  enhanced
      check_mst can only be used  to check tapes generated by the
      enhanced generate_mst command.  To check tapes generated in
      earlier releases use the >obs>check_mst command.

b-15. (10.1)  Deleted the  merge_mst command.   All Multics tapes
      should be made with the generate_mst command.

b-16. (10.1) Recompiled  all programs in the  system libraries to
      correct  errors  diagnosed  by  the  most  recent  compiler
      version and to update listings.

b-17. (10.1) Changed the list_vols command to display:

     ox    percentage used figures for records and VTOCEs
     ox    average segment size per PV
     ox    an  X  flag  to  indicate  PVs  inhibited  for  segment
          creation
     ox    Records/VTOCEs used via a -rec_used control arg
     ox    output information within eighty columns
     ox    and additionally,  to allow processing  of multiple LVs
          via the -lv control argument,  and not print the P flag
          indicating partitions.

b-18. (10.1)      Added      the      get_system_aim_attributes_,
      compute_common_aim_ceiling_,  and translate_aim_attributes_
      subroutines  to  support  subsystems in  conversion  of AIM
      attributes between two Multics systems.

b-19. (10.1)  Replaced  the  add_copyright  and copyright_archive
      commands   with  the   new  add_pnotice,  generate_pnotice,
      list_pnotice_names, and display_pnotice commands to provide
      compliance  with  new software  protection  rules.  Deleted
      >tools>bound_copyright_  which contained  the add_copyright
      command,     copyright_archive     command,     and     the
      copyright_notice_ subroutine.

b-20. (10.1)  Installed   the  describe_psp  command   to  return
      information   about   products  based   on   the  marketing
      identifier.

b-21. (10.1) Installed the mvt_ subroutine to allow for efficient
      translation  of  character strings  using  translations not
      known at compile time.



Contents of MR10.2            3-33                        SRB10.2


b-22. (10.1)  Installed  the new  describe_psp command  to return
      information   about   products  based   on   the  marketing
      identifier.

b-23. (10.1) Replaced the system active function key words:

           _O_l_d _K_e_y                  _N_e_w _K_e_y
           date_up                  date_time_last_up
           down_until_date          date_time_next_up
           down_until_time          date_time_next_up
           last_down_date           date_time_last_down
           last_down_time           date_time_last_down
           next_down_date           date_time_next_down
           next_down_time           date_time_next_down
           shift_change_date        date_time_shift_change
           shift_change_time        date_time_shift_change
           time_up                  date_time_last_up

      It will be necessary to  combine the system active function
      with the substr active function  to simulate the old system
      return information.   The old key words  have been retained
      for compatibility.

b-24. (10.2)  Version  2  multi-segment  tables  (MSTBs)  are now
      supported.   In addition  to the capabilities  of Version 1
      MSTBs,  a Version  2 MSTB  provides for  the efficient case
      insensitive search of the  table.  The display_mstb command
      now   reports  the   version  number   of  an   MSTB.   The
      salvage_mstb command automatically converts Version 1 MSTBs
      to  Version  2.  As  Version  1 MSTBs  will continue  to be
      supported  for  the  forseeable future,  conversion  of the
      existing system MSTBs, the PNT  and URF, is not required in
      this release.

b-25. (10.2)  Deleted  the  compare_dump_tape_status  command and
      enhanced the copy_dump_tape  and compare_dump_tape commands
      functionality  to allow  for this  deletion.  Specifically,
      copy_dump_tape  and  compare_dump_tape now  set  a severity
      variable  which  can be  used to  determine the  success or
      failure of  a copy operation.  This  variable can be tested
      by using the severity active function.

b-26. (10.2)  Changed  (incompatibly)  Version  2  exec_com  &set
      statement to  strip quotes from its  arguments, the way the
      command  processor does,  making an  &set line  work like a
      value_set command line.









Contents of MR10.2            3-34                        SRB10.2


b-27. (10.2)   Changed   the    reduction_compiler   command   to
      automatically   invoke  the   PL/I  compiler   following  a
      successful translation by rdc.   Added several new features
      including:    -trace   control   argument   for   debugging
      reductions;  and setting  of a severity  variable which the
      severity  active  function can  reference to  determine the
      success of the compilation.

b-28. (10.2)  Deleted the  subsystem_utils_ subroutine.  Programs
      which  used the  subsystem_utils_ must now  be converted to
      use  the  new ssu_  utilities  which are  described  in the
      Programmer's  Reference  Manual, Order  No.  AG91,  and the
      Subroutines and I/O Modules, Order No.  AG93.

b-29. (10.2) Changed the io_call command to accept the open_file,
      close_file,  and detach  requests to  support the  new iox_
      entries.   Complete  documentation on  this command  can be
      found in  the Multics Commands and  Active Functions, Order
      No.  AG92.

b-30. (10.2)  Added  mrl_  and  mlr_  subroutines  which  provide
      efficient access  to the respective  hardware instructions.
      These subroutines are documented in the Multics Subroutines
      and I/O Modules, Order No.  AG93.

b-31. (10.2)  Enhanced  the  display_subsystem_usage  command  by
      adding  the -version  control argument  and a  version sort
      type, allowing  the use of -totals  with -user or -version,
      allowing the use of -first N  with -user, and by making the
      totals  printed  when selecting  a  subset of  entries (via
      -user or -version) reflect only the selected entries.

b-32. (10.2)   Added  the   initiate_file_$create  entrypoint  to
      initiate  a  segment or  create it  if necessary.   Added a
      DELETE bit to the  terminate_file_ action argument clean up
      after a call to initiate_file_$create.

b-33. (10.2)  Changed the  dump_vtoce tool  to accept  a pathname
      argument that no longer  requires the use of display_branch
      when only a pathname is known.

b-34. (10.2)  Added  the -public_domain  control argument  to the
      add_pnotice  command  to provide  a public  domain software
      protection notice.

b-35. (10.2)  Added   the  -pathname  control   argument  to  the
      print_configuration_deck command to  allow specification of
      the  config deck  to be  displayed.  By  default (as  it is
      now),  the  print_configuration_deck  command  displays the
      live deck.





Contents of MR10.2            3-35                        SRB10.2


b-36. (10.2) Added io_call support  for window_io_ control orders
      and   new  keywords   to  the   window_call  command.   The
      supported_terminal  keyword  returns  "true"  if  the video
      system can  be invoked on  the specified terminal  type and
      the  video_invoked  keyword  returns  "true"  if  the video
      system  is   invoked  in  the  user's   process.   The  new
      window_io_   control    orders   are   get/set_more_prompt,
      get/set_more_handler,                get/set_more_response,
      get/set_token_characters,            get/set_window_status,
      get/set_editing_chars, and set_editor_key_bindings.  (Refer
      to  Multics Menu  Creation Facilities, Order  No.  CP51, or
      Multics Subroutines and I/O Modules, Order No.  AG93.

      Extended  the video  system input-line-editor  to provide a
      facility  for setting  editor key  bindings.  Any keystroke
      sequence may  be set to  invoke any of  the internal editor
      routines (such as forward-word)  as well as editor routines
      written  by the  user.  (For detailed  information, see the
      description  of the  set_editor_key_bindings control order,
      for the  window_io_ I/O module, in  Multics Subroutines and
      I/O Modules, Order No.  AG93.)

      Changed handling of raw output  in the video system so that
      calls  to   window_$write_raw_text  no  longer   result  in
      spurious   cursor   position   operations.    However,  the
      screen_invalid   status   flag  is   set   by  a   call  to
      write_raw_text, and must be reset by the application before
      any further  video operations can be  performed.  (For more
      information, see the description  of the window_ subroutine
      in Multics Subroutines and I/O Modules, Order No.  AG93.)

b-37. (10.2)  Added a  subroutine interface  to the  qedx editor.
      (Refer to the qedx_ description in the Subroutines manual.)


_T_a_p_e _S_o_f_t_w_a_r_e


c- 1. (10.0)  Changed the  tape_ansi_ subroutine  to increase the
      maximum  legal block  size from  8192 to  99996 bytes.  The
      default  block size  remains 2048  bytes.  Note  that block
      sizes  larger  than  2048  bytes, while  valid  on Multics,
      violate the  ANSI tape standard.  No  special permission is
      required to use larger block  sizes up to 12288 bytes.  For
      blocks   larger   than   12288   bytes,   access   to   the
      >sc1>rcp>workspace.acs  or the  rcp_sys_ gate  is required.
      The tape_ansi_ subroutine conforms to ANSI X3.27-1978 Level
      1, entitled American National Standard Magnetic Tape Labels
      and File Structure for Information Interchange.  It thereby
      complies with  the Federal Information  Processing Standard
      79 (FIPS).




Contents of MR10.2            3-36                        SRB10.2


c- 2. (10.0)  Changed  RCP  to  allow specification  of  the tape
      handler speed (in  inches per second).  This is  done via a
      -speed control argument in  the assign_resource command, or
      -speed control argument in the resource_description for the
      reserve_resource command.

c- 3. (10.0)  Changed  the  tape_in  and  tape_out  commands:  to
      implement  the  documented   but  previously  unimplemented
      features of the "-ring"  control argument; to recognize the
      new maximum  block sizes for tape_ibm_  and tape_ansi_; and
      to support 6250 BPI tapes.   Also fixed all known errors in
      these commands.

c- 4. (10.0) Changed the read_tape_and_query  command to accept a
      "-comment" control argument to  specify a string display on
      the operator's console with the mount request.

c- 5. (10.0) Changed the tape_archive tape volume query to accept
      32   character  volumes   rather  than   only  8.   Changed
      load_table to accept the -density control argument.

c- 6. (10.1)  Installed  tape_ioi_ (a  new  tape interface)  as a
      replacement  for  the undocumented  tdcm_  interface.  User
      programs using  tdcm_ should be converted  to tape_ioi_ due
      to   the  improved   functionality,  error   recovery,  and
      performance.   The  tdcm_  interfaces will  continue  to be
      supported  for  the  immediate  future.   Of  the  tape I/O
      modules supplied  with the system, only  the tape_mult_ I/O
      module has been converted to  use tape_ioi_.  The other I/O
      modules will be converted in a future release.

c- 7. (10.1) Moved the ntape_ I/O module to the obsolete library.
      Sites should use tape_nstd_.

c- 8. (10.1) Increased  the maximum IOI workspace  size from 3072
      words to 6144 words when processing tapes for users lacking
      access to workspace.acs.


















Contents of MR10.2            3-37                        SRB10.2


c- 9. (10.2)  Several  new  features  and  bug  fixes  have  been
      included  in  tape_archive  version 4.   Added  an optional
      -alternate argument to the  'alter table density N' request
      to permit  independent management of  volume set densities.
      Mixed tape drive configurations  are supported by including
      the  -density  argument  on  all  mount  requests.  Default
      density references have been centralized to an include file
      constant.   The  xd and  xdf  requests are  supported  in a
      similar  manner  to archive.   Specifying  -long for  the t
      request on an empty  tape produces long header information.
      Additional checks  have been added  to prevent tape_archive
      from inadvertently deleting the  table currently being used
      for processing.

      Because  of the  current action  of ANSI  and IBM  tape I/O
      modules  when  -density  is  omitted  (i.e.,  honoring  the
      current density  of the VOL1  label), it is  possible for a
      tape_archive  volume  set  to  actually  be  recorded  at a
      density different  than that specified in  the table.  With
      version 4 the recording density in the table must match the
      volume  set  density.  Any  discrepancies may  be rectified
      using the 'alter table density N' request.

      In fact, altering the density of the primary volume set for
      a non-empty table is permitted with a warning only to bring
      the density  entered in the  table in line  with the actual
      recording density of the  volume set.  Automatic compaction
      of a volume  set is scheduled only when  the density of the
      alternate volume set is changed.


_C_o_m_m_a_n_d_s _U_s_i_n_g _V_a_l_u_e _S_e_g_m_e_n_t_s


d- 1. (10.0)  Changed  the check_info_segs  command to  store the
      date/time  it  last  checked  info segments  in  the user's
      default  value segment  rather than in  the profile segment
      used  by  the  abbrev command.   The  command automatically
      copies the  date/time from the user's  profile segment into
      the  default  value  segment  the  first  time  it  is used
      following the installation of this release.

d- 2. (10.0)  Changed   the  print_motd  command   to  store  the
      information required to determine changes to the message of
      the day in the user's  default value segment rather than in
      a segment named Person_id.motd  in the home directory.  The
      command  automatically  copies  the  information  from  the
      Person_id.motd  segment and  then deletes  that segment the
      first time it is used after the installation of MR10.0.






Contents of MR10.2            3-38                        SRB10.2


d- 3. (10.0) Changed the -all  control argument to the value_list
      command   to   list   the   names  of   variables   set  by
      value_$set_data  in   addition  to  the   values  currently
      displayed.  Added  the -data control argument  to list only
      the data variables.

d- 4. (10.2) Added  the -data and  -all control arguments  to the
      value_delete    command   to    delete   values    set   by
      value_$set_data.

      Added  the  -brief  control  argument  to  the value_delete
      command  to  suppress  the  error  message  "No  match  for
      starname...".

      Added   the   -pop  control   argument  to   the  value_get
      command/active function to allow the user to pop and return
      a value.


_O_t_h_e_r _O_n_l_i_n_e _L_i_b_r_a_r_y _S_o_f_t_w_a_r_e


e- 1. (10.0)  Installed the  dial_out command  to allow  users to
      access  a  remote  system  through  autocall  channels  (as
      defined in the CDT).  The  command is documented in the MPM
      Communications I/O Manual (Order No.  CC92).

e- 2. (10.0) Added  new commands to  make it easier  for users to
      enter   output   (dprint    or   dpunch)   requests.    The
      enter_output_request  (eor)  command  allows  nonpositional
      control arguments,  supports star convention,  and lets the
      user define default control  argument settings for the many
      output-related  control  arguments.   User-defined defaults
      are  specified  by  allowing  the user  to  define  his own
      request types.  This command  replaces the functionality of
      the dprint and dpunch commands.  However, dprint and dpunch
      are retained for compatibility.

      Added  several  new  commands to  support  the user-defined
      request      types     of      eor.      These     include:
      cancel_output_request  (cor),  list_output_requests  (lor),
      move_output_request (mor)  and total_output_requests (tor).
      Also  updated  the  print_request_types  (prt)  command  to
      support user-defined request types and to work as an active
      function.   Refer  to MPM  Commands  (Order No.   AG92) for
      further details.

e- 3. (10.0)  Changed  the  Video  System to  allow  the  user to
      control  MORE  handling.  In  addition some  serious errors
      were  fixed, such  as:  an  asynchronous output  error that
      causes process termination; an  error that causes long line
      truncation; and a serious  looping error that significantly
      impacts performance.


Contents of MR10.2            3-39                        SRB10.2


e- 4. (10.0) Changed  initiate_file_ and initiate_file_$component
      entrypoints to return  a zero error code when  a segment or
      component to be initiated has a zero bit count.

e- 5. (10.0) Added the cv_error_$name subroutine which, given the
      name of an error table  entry point, returns the error code
      associated with that name.

e- 6. (10.1)  Added the  -defer_until_process_termination control
      argument to  the dprint and  enter_output_request commands.
      Use of  this argument defers  dprinting the file  (e.g., an
      absentee output file) until  the process terminates or logs
      out.

e- 7. (10.1)      Changed       the      list_retrieval_requests,
      list_daemon_requests, and  list_output_requests commands to
      search all queues by default.

e- 8. (10.1) Enhanced  the video system line  editor to include a
      subset  of Emacs  editing requests.   The requests provided
      are:

     ox    forward character (^F)
     ox    backward character (^B)
     ox    delete character (^D)
     ox    rubout character (DEL or #)
     ox    forward word (ESC F)
     ox    backward word (ESC B)
     ox    delete word (ESC D)
     ox    rubout word (ESC DEL or ESC #)
     ox    go to beginning of line (@)
     ox    kill to end of line (^K)
     ox    yank last kill (^Y)
     ox    yank previous item in kill ring (ESC Y)
     ox    clear window and redisplay line (^L)
     ox    quote next character (^Q)
     ox    twiddle characters (^T)

e- 9. (10.1)  Changed  the  sort_seg  command  to  provide better
      protection from accidental sorting of segments.  If neither
      the  -replace  nor  -segment control  arguments  are given,
      sort_seg asks if the user really wants to replace the input
      segment with  a sorted version.   This may cause  some user
      exec_coms to ask questions that had not been asked in prior
      releases.   The  question  may  be  avoided  by  using  the
      -replace  control argument  to explicitly  request that the
      input segment be replaced by its sorted contents.

      Changed  the sort_seg  command by  adding new  features for
      specifying sort fields.  Refer  to the Multics Commands and
      Active Functions Manual, Order No.  AG92, for details.




Contents of MR10.2            3-40                        SRB10.2


e-10. (10.1) Installed the sort_seg_  subroutine to provide entry
      points  for sorting  segments and  character strings.  This
      subroutine  interface is  used by the  sort_seg command and
      provides  all  of  the  facilities of  the  command  at the
      subroutine level.

e-11. (10.1)  Updated  the buffer  manipulation strategy  used by
      qedx  to  make  better  use of  segments  and significantly
      reduced the number of modified pages in disk queues.

e-12. (10.1)  Added the  Q request  to qedx  as a  synonym to the
      existing   quit   request.   The   quit  request   will  be
      incompatibly changed in the  next release, MR10.2, to query
      the  user  if  a modified  buffer  exists at  the  time the
      request  is   issued.   Any  exec_coms   required  to  quit
      unconditionally from qedx invocations  should be changed to
      use the Q request.

e-13. (10.1) Added the timed_io_ subroutine to allow a program to
      regain  control when  an IO  operation takes  longer than a
      specified amount  of time.  Entrypoints  are provided which
      are   equivalent  to   iox_$get_chars,  iox_$get_line,  and
      iox_$put_chars.   For IO  operations utilizing  the tty_ IO
      module  timed_io_ uses  three new  control orders  in tty_:
      get_chars_timeout, put_chars_timeout, and get_line_timeout.

e-14. (10.1) Installed  the compare_pl1.ec to  compare the source
      of two PL/1 programs ignoring most formatting differences.

e-15. (10.1)  Added  the  validate_processid  entry  to  hcs_  to
      validate that a process identifier corresponds to a process
      which exists.

e-16. (10.1) Added the xd key to the archive command to extract a
      component into a segment and then delete the component from
      the archive.

e-17. (10.1) Changed the create_dir command to set directory ring
      brackets to 7,7 by default.   The default can be overridden
      by   using   the  -ring_brackets   control   argument  with
      create_dir.

e-18. (10.1) Changed the create, create_dir, and link commands to
      no  longer  accept  names  beginning with  dashes  or blank
      names.










Contents of MR10.2            3-41                        SRB10.2


e-19. (10.1)  Added the  -chase, -check,  and -copy_names control
      arguments to the link command.  The -chase control argument
      causes the created link to  point to the ultimate target of
      the  specified  target path.   The -check  control argument
      causes link to abort if  the specified link target does not
      exist or if its existence cannot be determined because of a
      lack  of access.   The -copy_names  control argument copies
      the link target's names to the created link.

e-20. (10.1)  Changed the  abbrev command  and standard subsystem
      request to  work as an  active function or  active request.
      As  an  active function  abbrev returns  the value  true or
      false.  This response  indicates abbreviation processing is
      enabled  or  disabled  at   command  level  or  within  the
      subsystem.

e-21. (10.1)  Changed  the  name  of  the  supervisor  gate  from
      xhcs_$get_stack_ptr   to    hcs_$set_stack_ptr.    Programs
      calling  xhcs_$get_stack_ptr  should  be  updated  to  call
      hcs_$get_stack_ptr.  For  compatibility the name  xhcs_ has
      been added  to hcs_.  The  xhcs_ name will be  removed in a
      future release.

e-22. (10.1) Added the -output_file (-of) control argument to the
      compare_ascii command to direct  the output of a comparison
      to a user specified file.

e-23. (10.1)  Provided  a set  of standard  functions for  use by
      application  writers  in developing  their  own subsystems.
      Use of  ssu_ functions will enable  the application builder
      to provide subsystems which are consistent in terms of user
      interface and system response.

e-24. (10.1)  Changed  get_quota to  allow its  use as  an active
      funtion.   When  used  as  an  active  function  it returns
      terminal   quota   on  a   single  directory.    Added  the
      -records_left, -quota, and  -records_used control arguments
      for   either  command   or  active   function  usage.   The
      -records_left  control  argument   returns  the  number  of
      available pages in a directory, -quota returns the terminal
      quota  on  each  directory, and  -records_used  returns the
      number of pages used in each directory.

e-25. (10.1)  Added  the  -all,  -brief,  -chase,  and  -no_chase
      control  arguments  to the  mbx_set_acl  and mbx_delete_acl
      commands.   The  -all  control  argument  deletes  all  ACL
      entries except *.SysDaemon.*.   The -brief control argument
      suppresses  the  "User name  not  on ACL"  and  "Empty ACL"
      messages.   The  -chase  control  argument,  default value,
      chases  linked  mailboxes  while  -no_chase  suppresses the
      chasing of links when using the star convention.




Contents of MR10.2            3-42                        SRB10.2


e-26. (10.1)  Added  the  -brief, -chase,  and  -no_chase control
      arguments    to   the    mbx_list_acl   command.    Changed
      mbx_list_acl  to  be  callable  as an  active  function and
      return the modes and access names of matching entries.

e-27. (10.1)  Changed the  default value for  the -target control
      argument to l68 for compiling ALM programs.

e-28. (10.1)  Installed   the  have_queue_entries  command/active
      function to  return true if  there are messages  in a queue
      message segment and false if there are no messages.

e-29. (10.1) Changed the who command to no longer list daemons by
      default.   The  -daemon control  argument  MUST be  used to
      display daemon processes.  Added  the -all control argument
      to list daemon, absentee, and interactive users.

e-30. (10.2) Installed  the where_doc, explain_doc,  and tutorial
      commands.   The  explain_doc  command  returns  information
      about  a manual  specified by  manual name,  short name, or
      order  number.  The  where_doc command returns  the name of
      the  manual(s) that  contain information  about a specified
      topic_name   where   topic_name   is   a   topic,  command,
      subroutine,  or I/O  module.  The  tutorial command invokes
      the Multics Tutorial, a menu-driven introduction to Multics
      that may be used to learn the basic features of the Multics
      system.

e-31. (10.2)  Added the  -brief, -no_start_up,  -8bit, and -modes
      control arguments to the dial_out command.  Added new modes
      send_if,  echo_if, and  quit.  Replaced the  -raw and -line
      control arguments with a raw and ^raw mode where raw is the
      default.  Changed  dial_out to provide  a CR when  the user
      types a CR, even in lfecho mode.

e-32. (10.2)  Added  the wait  request  to dial_out  to  ease the
      creation of dial_out exec_coms.

      Added the  connect command to simplify  the connection to a
      foreign system by a user.

e-33. (10.2)  Enhanced   support  of  generic   destinations  for
      dial_out   by   providing  the   ability  to   dial_out  or
      priv_attach a channel given a generic destination specifier
      such as tymnet, modem, protocol_converter_box, etc.

e-34. (10.2) Changed the system command/active function and added
      the system_info_$version_id subroutine  entry to supply the
      version_id    obtained    from    the    MULT    tape   via
      active_all_rings_data.





Contents of MR10.2            3-43                        SRB10.2


e-35. (10.2) Changed the  assign_resource command to additionally
      perform  as  an active  function.   It returns  true  if an
      assignment  is successful  and false  otherwise.  The -long
      control  argument is  not allowed  in the  active function.
      The list_resources  command can be used  to obtain the name
      of the assigned devices.

e-36. (10.2)  The qedx  command can  now be  invoked recursively.
      When this is done, qedx informs the user and asks if he/she
      wishes  to  continue.   Answering  this  query  with  a "?"
      causes qedx  to display an explanation  of the implications
      of recursive invocations.

e-37. (10.2)  The  qedx  editor  now  accepts  archive  component
      pathnames, in  the initial macro pathname,  as the argument
      to the  -pathname control argument,  and as an  argument to
      the  read  request.   Attempts   to  write  to  an  archive
      component,  however, produce  the standard  "This procedure
      may not modify archive components."  error message.

e-38. (10.2) Changed the qedx editor to implement trusted default
      pathnames   like   those   implemented   within   ted.   In
      particular,  any attempt  to read  a file  into a non-empty
      buffer, or write only part of a buffer to a file, no longer
      causes qedx to forget  the default pathname associated with
      the   buffer.    Instead,   the  pathname   is   marked  as
      untrustworthy and the next attempt to read or write without
      an explicit  pathname causes qedx to  ask for permission to
      use the default pathname.


























Contents of MR10.2            3-44                        SRB10.2


e-39. (10.2) The subroutine interface  to the Multics Mail System
      has been installed.

      Converted  all  of  the  standard  Multics  mail processing
      subsystems     --     the     Extended     Mail    Facility
      (print_mail/read_mail/send_mail),   the    Executive   Mail
      Facility, and the  Emacs mail subsystem -- to  use this new
      interface.   However,  the  mail  command,  the  send_mail_
      subroutine,   and   the    interactive   message   facility
      (accept_messages/send_message) have not yet been converted.

      Extended the Multics Mail System to support three new types
      of addressses:  mailing lists,  forum meetings, and entries
      in   a  system-wide   Mail  Table.    The  mail  processing
      subsystems  listed  above automatically  support  these new
      address types due to their conversion to the new interface.

      A  mailing list  is an  ASCII segment  or archive component
      which  contains  one or  more  addresses.  Mail  sent  to a
      mailing list is delivered to all the addresses specified in
      the segment or archive component.

      The Mail Table provides the ability  to send mail to a user
      without  having  to  know  on which  projects  the  user is
      registered.  Users are allowed  to update their own entries
      in the table.  The mail  table also provides the ability to
      define  system-wide names  for mailing lists  or other mail
      system addresses.

      For more information on these facilities, type:

                help mail_system.gi
                help message_format.gi
                help mail_addresses.gi
                help mail_table.gi
                help mailing_lists.gi

e-40. (10.2)  Added  the  cv_links_to_mail_table  command  to aid
      those  sites which  have been  making use  of the Mailboxes
      link directory.  This command  tool attempts to incorporate
      the   information   from   the   mailbox   links  directory
      (>udd>Daemon>mailboxes) into the  Mail Table, prompting the
      user (who must have access  to mail_table_priv_) when it is
      unsure of a mapping (generally due to case differences).











Contents of MR10.2            3-45                        SRB10.2


e-41. (10.2) Defined a canonical form for mail system messages to
      allow   a   more   efficient   search   by   read_mail  and
      executive_mail.   For  information on  this  message format
      type:

                help message_format.gi -section canonical form

      Mailboxes  containing  many   pre-MR10.2  messages  can  be
      canonicalized  by  using the  canonicalize_mailbox command;
      users   are  cautioned   to  read  the   Notes  section  of
      message_format.gi.info or description  provided in Commands
      and Active  Functions, Order No.  AG92,  prior to using the
      canonicalize_mailbox command, as  it has side-effects which
      may be undesirable.   A canonicalize_mailbox.ec is provided
      for  system  administrators  who wish  to  canonicalize all
      saveboxes in a subtree;  see the Installation Instructions,
      Section 4, for more information on this.

e-42. (10.2)       Added        the       mailbox_$compact_index,
      mailbox_$compact_file,  message_segment_$compact_index, and
      message_segment_$compact_file  ring-1   primitives  to  the
      system.  These primitives provide the capability to compact
      mailboxes  and  message segments,  thus  eliminating unused
      space.       Modified      the      mailbox_$close      and
      message_segment_$close primitives  to automatically request
      a  compaction  of  the  mailbox or  message  segment  if it
      contains more than 25% unused space.

e-43. (10.2)  Added  the mailbox_$copy  and message_segment_$copy
      ring-1 primitives  to the system to  provide the capability
      to copy mailboxes and message segments respectively.

e-44. (10.2)  Added  the -output_switch  control argument  to the
      print command to allow the output  to be directed to an I/O
      switch  other  than user_output.   Added the  -last control
      argument to select the last N lines of a file for printing.

e-45. (10.2)  Added  16  control arguments  to  the archive_table
      command to allow a user to obtain information without using
      the  file_output command.   The new  control arguments are:
      -absolute_pathname,       -bit_count,      -component_name,
      -date_time_contents_modified,  -date_time_updated, -header,
      -mode,        -name,        -requote,        -no_bit_count,
      -no_date_time_contents_modified,     -no_date_time_updated,
      -no_header,  -no_mode,  -no_name,  and  -no_requote.  (Type
      "help  act"  for  more  detail,  or  refer  to  the command
      description in Multics Commands and Active Functions, Order
      No.  AG92.







Contents of MR10.2            3-46                        SRB10.2


e-46. (10.2)  Added  the  shortest_path  command/active function.
      This command has  the same syntax and function  as the path
      command/active function except that calls use the result of
      get_shortest_path_  on  the target  pathname as  the return
      value.

e-47. (10.2) Changed  the move command to  preserve the following
      attributes  of  a  segment  or MSF:   complete  volume dump
      switch,  copy switch,  incremental volume  dump switch, max
      length,  ring  brackets,  and  safety  switch.   When  ring
      brackets  cannot   be  maintained  a   warning  message  is
      displayed.

e-48. (10.2) Added  the -time_zone control argument  to the time,
      date_time,  and the  other date_time  commands that display
      date  and  time.   The  -time_zone  argument  converts  the
      displayed time to a specified time zone.


_M_U_L_T_I_C_S _P_R_I_C_E_D _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E _P_R_O_D_U_C_T_S


_A_P_L

      (10.2) Installed  APL Version 5.02 to  fix bugs and provide
      several new features.

f- 1. Changed  APL  to use  apl search  paths to  locate external
      functions and workspaces to be loaded.

f- 2. Added  the qCALL  function to  allow invocation  of pl1 and
      fortran programs.  This function  allows a more generalized
      parameter list than previously provided.

f- 3. Added an apl_coded_ subroutine  interface to provide stream
      type I/O for the APL environment.


_C_O_B_O_L

      (10.2) Installed  Version 5.3 of the  COBOL compiler to fix
      numerous bugs.


_E_M_A_C_S

      (10.0) Installed Emacs version 11.11 which includes several
      new features.







Contents of MR10.2            3-47                        SRB10.2


h- 1. (10.0)  Adds a  new prefix  ^\ (undo-prefix).   This prefix
      sets the variable "undo" to  t, informing the next function
      called to  attempt to do  the reverse of  its usual action.
      Thus, typing ^\ ^X_  de-underlines the current region.  Use
      of this new prefix will be  extended to other requests in a
      future release.

h- 2. (10.0)   Adds   a  new   define-command   (defcom)  keyword
      "&undo-function" ("&undo").   This is used  to introduce an
      action for the undo prefix (^\) for a user-defined command.
      Refer  to  the Emacs  Extension  Writers' Guide  (Order No.
      CJ52) for further details.

h- 3. (10.0) Changed Emacs to  find the start_up.emacs segment by
      a simple heuristic, like  the start_up.ec heuristic.  If no
      start_up.emacs is found in the user's home directory, Emacs
      looks  in the  project directory  and then  in >site  for a
      start_up.emacs segment.

h- 4. (10.0)   Added   new  options,   including:   command-bell,
      command-bell-count,    and   meter-commands.     For   more
      information, type:  help emacs.changes

      (10.1) Installed Emacs version 12.0b which includes several
      minor enhancements.

h- 5. (10.2)  Upgraded  Emacs RMAIL  to use  the new  MR10.2 mail
      system   primitives.   This   has  implicitly   fixed  many
      problems,  most  notably all  of  the RMAIL  header parsing
      deficiencies.  It  also allows RMAIL users  to send mail to
      mailing lists, forum meetings, and mail table addresses.

      When  determining  the  sender's return  address,  RMAIL no
      longer          makes          use          of          the
      emacs-site-dir>rmail-full-name-table         or         the
      "my-personal-name"  variable.   Instead   the  mail  system
      obtains   the   user's   real    name   from   either   the
      Person_id.full_name._  or  full_name._   variables  in  the
      user's default value segment.

h- 6. (10.2) SPECIAL  NOTICE:  In a  future release of  Emacs the
      read-file command (^X^R) will be  changed to query the user
      for permission to read the  file if the buffer is modified.
      This  query  will be  skipped  is ^X^R  is given  a numeric
      argument  (e.g.,  ^U^X^R).  This  change may  affect users'
      saved  keyboard  macros.   Users  who rely  on  the current
      behavior in keyboard macros should change them now to use a
      supplied numeric argument.  A  supplied numeric argument is
      currently ignored,  however making the change  at this time
      will  significantly reduce  the impact  of the incompatible
      change.  This  change should not  affect extensions written
      in Lisp  since those extensions should  not be calling this
      function.


Contents of MR10.2            3-48                        SRB10.2


_E_x_e_c_u_t_i_v_e _M_a_i_l

      (10.0) Installed Executive Mail  version 1.5.  This version
      corrects several problems found in prior releases.

i- 1. (10.0) Note:   In order to  use the Multics  Executive Mail
      Facility, the user's terminal type must:

     ox    be  defined with  a video  table entry  in the Terminal
          Type File (TTF).

     ox    be defined with a function key table in the TTF, if the
          terminal has  function keys F1 through  F8 and the user
          wants to use these function keys with Executive Mail

      The TTF  is described in the  MPM Communications I/O manual
      (Order No.  CC92).

      (10.2) Installed Executive Mail version 2.0b.  This version
      corrects several problems found in prior releases.

i- 2. (10.2)     Changed     the     xmail     directory     from
      >udd>Project>Person>Person.xmail                         to
      >udd>Project>Person>Person.mlsys.   The  new name  is added
      when  the directory  exists.  When  the directory  does not
      exist a directory with the name Person.mlsys is created.

      Changed the xmail mailing list  suffix from .mlist to .mls.
      Addnames  with the  suffix .mls  are added  to all existing
      mailing lists  in the xmail directory.   Newly created ones
      use the new name.

      The  name changes  are required for  compatability with the
      new mail system.  All newly created links, ecs, and abbrevs
      should  use  the new  naming convensions.   Existing links,
      ecs, and abbrevs  should be changed, but the  old names are
      retained so that they will not break.


_E_x_t_e_n_d_e_d _M_a_i_l _F_a_c_i_l_i_t_y


j- 1. (10.1)  Incorporated numerous  enhancements to  the Multics
      Mail  System.    Several  of  the   enhancements  represent
      incompatible  changes  in  the  user  interface.   In these
      cases,  the  old  interface  will still  be  supported, but
      undocumented,  and  will be  removed  in a  future release.
      Complete  documentation  of  these  changes  are  available
      online and  in the Multics Mail  System User's Guide, Order
      No.  CH23.





Contents of MR10.2            3-49                        SRB10.2


j- 2. (10.1)  Converted the  read_mail and  send_mail commands to
      use the  new subsystem utilities made  available in MR10.0.
      This  conversion  provides numerous  enhancements  to these
      subsystems including:

     ox    abbreviation processing  of request lines  using either
          the  same  or a  different  profile from  that  used at
          Multics command level.

     ox    additional  standard  requests including  exec_com, do,
          if, answer, ready, ready_on, ready_off, subsystem_name,
          and subsystem_version.

     ox    improved self-documentation facilities  including a new
          definition of  the "?"  request,  the new list_requests
          and  list_help requests,  and an  improved help request
          including the capability to use "help -brief".


PRINT_MAIL


k- 1. (10.1) Added  short names, shown in  parenthesis, for three
      query responses;  yes (y), no (n),  and reprint (print, pr,
      p).

k- 2. (10.1)  Add the  -long, -no_list,  -own, -count, -no_count,
      -acknowledge, and -no_acknowledge  control arguments to the
      print_mail command.

k- 3. (10.1) Added a program_interrupt  handler to the print_mail
      command  to  repeat the  "Delete  this message?"   query to
      allow a user to interrupt the display of a long message and
      go directly  to the query  when the user  decides to delete
      the message.

k- 4. (10.1) Changed the print_mail  command to recognize the "?"
      response  and  display a  list  of valid  responses  to the
      "Delete this message?"  query.


READ_MAIL AND PRINT_MAIL


l- 1. (10.1)  Changed   (incompatibly)  the  way   read_mail  and
      print_mail interpret a noncontrol  argument used to specify
      the  mailbox on  the command  line.  The  argument is first
      interpreted as -mailbox  STR; if no mailbox is  found it is
      interpreted  as -save  STR; if  no savebox  is found  it is
      interpreted as -user STR.





Contents of MR10.2            3-50                        SRB10.2


l- 2. (10.1)  Changed  the  message  sent  when  acknowledging  a
      message in  read_mail or print_mail to  include the subject
      of the original message if present.

l- 3. (10.1)  Changed   read_mail  and  print_mail   to  issue  a
      reset_more control  order after displaying  each message to
      allow users of video systems to easily abort the display of
      a single message when displaying several messages.  This is
      an incompatible change from prior releases of read_mail.

l- 4. (10.2)  Changed  the  -no_header  control  argument  of the
      print_mail  command  and  the  read_mail  print  request to
      display no  information from the header.   Only the message
      number, line count, and  message body are displayed.  Added
      the -brief_header  control argument to  display the minimal
      amount  of information  from the  message header, including
      the  date,  author(s),  and  subject  of  the  message.  In
      addition,  an indication  of whether  the user  is the sole
      recipient  of  the  message  is  included  along  with  any
      comments added to the message  if it was forwarded by other
      users.


READ_MAIL

      (10.1) Installed read_mail version 8.3.

m- 1. (10.1)  Added  the  -count,  -no_count,  -acknowledge,  and
      -no_acknowledge control arguments to the read_mail command.

m- 2. (10.1)  Added  the  print_header  request  to  read_mail to
      display   the   complete  header   of  the   message.   The
      -header_only control argument,  used with previous releases
      to display the message header,  is now obsolete and will be
      deleted in a future release.

m- 3. (10.1) Added the apply request  to read_mail to function in
      a  fashion  similar  to  the  apply  request  in send_mail.
      However, in  this release, any changes  made to the message
      text  by  the  Multics  command  are  not  recorded  in the
      mailbox.

m- 4. (10.1) Added short names, shown in parenthesis, for several
      read_mail requests; current (c), delete (dl, d), first (f),
      forward (fwd, for), last (l), and print (pr, p).










Contents of MR10.2            3-51                        SRB10.2


m- 5. (10.1) Replaced the -all  control argument accepted by most
      read_mail     requests    with     the    -include_deleted,
      -only_deleted,  and  -only_non_deleted  control  arguments.
      The  -all control  argument was previously  used to specify
      that the request was to  act on both deleted and nondeleted
      messages and  is directly replaced  by the -include_deleted
      control argument.  The  -only_deleted and -only_non_deleted
      control  arguments  allow selection  of the  other possible
      groupings  with  respect  to  deleted  messages.   The -all
      control  argument  is  no  longer  documented  and  will be
      deleted in a future release.

m- 6. (10.1)  Added  new control  arguments  to the  list, print,
      print_header, delete, and retrieve requests in read_mail to
      allow  selection  of messages  by date,  author, recipient,
      and/or subject.

m- 7. (10.1)  Added the  -prompt STR,  -no_prompt, -include_self,
      and  -no_include_self   control  arguments  to   the  reply
      request.   The -no_include_self  default prevents  the user
      from receiving a copy of  the reply without taking specific
      action.  This  constitutes an incompatible  change with the
      previous release of read_mail.

m- 8. (10.1) Enhanced the read_mail reply request to:

     ox    list the recipients of a reply rather than stating only
          the number of recipients to receive the reply,

     ox    include the Date, From,  and Subject fields in addition
          to   the   original  text   in   the  reply   when  the
          -include_original control argument is specified,

     ox    create the send_mail used to compose the reply with the
          same  state of  abbreviation processing  and profile as
          the read_mail invocation in which the reply was given,

     ox    refuse  to  honor  the   -delete  control  argument  if
          send_mail is exited without sending the reply,

     ox    allow the -line_length N, -indent N, -include_self, and
          -no_include_self control  arguments to be  given on the
          read_mail  command line  to set default  values for any
          use  of   the  reply  request   within  that  read_mail
          invocation.










Contents of MR10.2            3-52                        SRB10.2


m- 9. (10.1) Changed  the read_mail command to  query the user if
      an attempt is  made to delete a message  which has not been
      listed,  printed,  saved, or  written.  The  -force control
      argument for the delete request may be used to suppress the
      query.   The  query is  an  incompatible change  from prior
      releases of read_mail.

      (10.2) Installed read_mail version 9.1e.

m-10. (10.2)  Added  the  -add_comments control  argument  to the
      read_mail forward request to  provide the capability to add
      a comment to  a message when it is  forwarded.  The user is
      prompted  for text  to be  used as  the forwarding comment.
      This  text may  be edited  as in  the reply  request and is
      placed in the header field named "Redistributed-Comment:".


SEND_MAIL

      (10.1) Installed send_mail version 6.0.

n- 1. (10.1) Changed (incompatibly) how send_mail fills a message
      to  make  send_mail  more  compatible  with  forum.   These
      changes include:

     ox    changed  the default  of terminal  input to  -fill, the
          default of file input is left unchanged as -no_fill.

     ox    filling,  if  enabled, takes  place after  exiting qedx
          during initial input rather  than before entering qedx.
          This  eliminates  the  previous  behavior  of send_mail
          where the user's qedx  editing request would often fail
          as  the message  in the  editor's buffer  was formatted
          differently from what was visible to the user.

     ox    filling, if enabled, occurs automatically following the
          execution  of  any qedx  or  apply request.   Added the
          -fill  and -no_fill  control arguments to  the qedx and
          apply  request to  allow the user  to control automatic
          filling.

n- 2. (10.1)  Changed  (incompatibly)   the  -input_file  control
      argument  in send_mail  to imply  the -request_loop control
      argument.

n- 3. (10.1)  Added several  new requests to  send_mail which are
      only available within a send_mail invocation created by the
      read_mail reply request.  The new  requests allow a user to
      examine  the  original  messages being  answered.   The new
      requests are print_original, list_original, save_originals,
      print_original_header, log_original, and write_original.




Contents of MR10.2            3-53                        SRB10.2


n- 4. (10.1) Added  short names, shown in  parenthesis, for three
      send_mail requests; append (app),  preface (prf), and print
      (pr, p).

      (10.2)  Installed  send_mail  version 8.0e  to  provide bug
      fixes and several new features.

n- 5. (10.2)  Changed the  send_mail command to  display an error
      message  and  return  to  command  level  immediately  upon
      detecting  an invalid  address on the  command line, rather
      than asking for the message text and entering the send_mail
      request loop.  Redefined the  -no_abort control argument to
      provide the old behavior of going to the request loop under
      these conditions.

n- 6. (10.2)  The  send_mail  "-no_header"  and  "-no_message_id"
      control  arguments,  while  still accepted,  are  no longer
      functional.  They will be eliminated in a future release.

n- 7. (10.2)  Changed  send_mail  qedx  to  require  a  write (w)
      request to  reflect any changes  made to the  message.  The
      quit (q)  request no longer  does an automatic  update.  If
      the  quit  request  is  issued  and  the  message  has been
      modified since it was last written, qedx will now query for
      permission  to exit.   If permission is  given, any changes
      made since the last write request will be lost.

n- 8. (10.2) Converted the in_reply_to request in send_mail to an
      "original"  request  (i.e.,  this request  is  only defined
      within send_mail invocations created by the read_mail reply
      request).  In addition, this  request now accepts read_mail
      message  specifiers  rather  than  a character  as  the new
      content of the In-Reply-To field.


OTHER MAIL UTILITIES


o- 1. (10.1)  Extended the  have_mail command to  accept the same
      mailbox  specification control  arguments as  read_mail and
      print_mail, including -mailbox, -user, -log, and -save.  In
      addition, added  control arguments to  control whether only
      interactive messages,  or ordinary mail, or  both are to be
      checked in  the mailbox; the  default is to  check both for
      compatibility  with   print_mail  and  prior   releases  of
      have_mail.

o- 2. (10.1) Added  the have_messages command  which is identical
      in function  to have_mail, but by  default, only checks the
      mailbox for interactive messages.





Contents of MR10.2            3-54                        SRB10.2


_F_O_R_T_R_A_N

      (10.0)  Installed  FORTRAN version  10, which  includes the
      following  new  features.   For  further  details  on these
      changes, type:  help fortran.new_features

p- 1. (10.0)  Changed the  fortran compiler to  make -table (-tb)
      the  default  control  argument  except  when  -optimize is
      specified.   When  the  -optimize  control  argument  is in
      effect,  the  default  is  -no_table  (-ntb).   This change
      automatically produces a symbol table, making it easier for
      programmers to debug FORTRAN  programs.  However, users who
      are compiling  FORTRAN programs for  production runs should
      be warned to  use -optimize to avoid the  symbol table (and
      incidentally,   to   gain   the   significant   performance
      improvements of optimization).

p- 2. (10.0)  Added  the  -check_multiply  (-ckmpy)  argument  to
      generate   code   to   check  for   overflows   in  integer
      multiplication.

p- 3. (10.0) Changed the defaults for nonoptimized compilation in
      ansi77  mode to  be -subscriptrange  (-subrg), -stringrange
      (-strg),  and  -check_multiply   (-ckmpy).   There  are  no
      changes  effecting  ansi66  mode  for  these  three control
      arguments  (-no_check_multiply  is the  default  for ansi66
      mode).  These control arguments  can be overridden by their
      respective   negative   control   arguments,   which   are:
      -no_subscriptrange (-nsubrg), -no_stringrange (-nstrg), and
      -no_check_multiply (-nckmpy).

p- 4. (10.0) Changed the processing of ENDFILE to be in line with
      that defined in the FORTRAN Standard.

p- 5. (10.0) Changed formatted logical input to be in conformance
      with the  FORTRAN standard.  The input  routines now accept
      any one of the four  character strings ".t", ".T", "t", and
      "T" as being TRUE.

p- 6. (10.0)  Changed  the value  of  the IOSTAT  variable  to be
      negative  if  the READ  detects  an end  of  file to  be in
      compliance with the FORTRAN standard.

      (10.1) Installed FORTRAN version  10.1 which includes minor
      bug fixes.

p- 7. (10.1)  Changed  namelist  and  list directed  I/O  when in
      ansi77  mode  to  make  output more  readable  and  more in
      compliance with the Fortran Standard.






Contents of MR10.2            3-55                        SRB10.2


     ox    character values are now  enclosed in apostrophes after
          removing any trailing spaces
     ox    space has been inserted before namelist variable names
     ox    leading  spaces  have been  removed from  numerical and
          logical values
     ox    nonsignificant  trailing zeros  have been  removed from
          numeric values
     ox    real and complex values are output in G-format

p- 8. (10.2) This version of FORTRAN allows programs to use large
      and very large arrays.  Large arrays (LAs) are individually
      less than one segment long,  but in aggregate, require more
      space  than  previously available  for automatic  or static
      storage.  Very large arrays (VLAs) are each larger than one
      segment.  Type "fortran_large_arrays.gi.info" for details.

      Programs  that  use  several LAs/VLAs  could  affect system
      performance.   System administrators  should be  careful in
      assigning disk  space to the directories  which are to hold
      the  extended  storage segments.   By default,  storage for
      LA/VLAs  is placed  in the  process directory.  Optionally,
      the  user   can  give  another  pathname   by  setting  the
      fsm_dir_dir_path variable in the  value segment.  (Refer to
      the MAM-System, Order No.  AK50 for more information.)

      LAs/VLAs  use segments  that are  a full  256K long.  After
      running  a program  with this  feature, the  process switch
      that controls use of 256K  segments is left on.  This means
      that programs  in general can  reference all 256K  words of
      any segment that  has a max length of  256K.  However, some
      system  and user  programs may  not work  correctly in this
      mode.  For example, an intended  reference to the last word
      may in fact turn into a  reference to the first word.  This
      is due to hardware  limitations in certain instructions not
      used  for  LA/VLAs.  This  mode  can be  turned off  by the
      process_switch_off  command with  the keyword  256K.  There
      should be no trouble as long as the use of 256K segments is
      only    through   FORTRAN    LAs/VLAs.    The    value   of
      sys_info$max_seg_size will remain at 255K.
















Contents of MR10.2            3-56                        SRB10.2


p- 9. (10.2) Other FORTRAN changes include:

a.  Improved ability to see variables through 'probe'.  PARAMETER
    defined variables are now visible to 'probe'.
b.  Improved  stability  of optimized  compilation  and optimized
    I/O.
c.  Numerous bug fixes.
d.  Improved listing output information.
e.  '77 mode conforms better to the '77 Standard, particularly in
    I/O.
f.  Many  I/O restrictions  have been  weakened or  removed, so a
    program  is  less likely  to terminate  prematurely due  to a
    fatal I/O error.
g.  Changed  processing of  the PAUSE statement  so that programs
    using  it  can  be  run absentee.   A  PAUSE  now  raises the
    condition  'fortran_pause',  which  can  be  handled  by 'on'
    condition handling.
h.  Conformance  to ANSI  Standards for  FORTRAN has  resulted in
    some changes in output formatting:
      - In both '66  and '77 modes, the type  of exponent ('D' or
        'E') for  a datum output through  a D, E or  G format was
        determined  by  whether the  datum  was double  or single
        precision.   This  is contrary  to both  the '66  and '77
        Standards.  The exponent type is now determined according
        to these Standards.  'D' is used  for D format and 'E' is
        used  for  E  and  G formats.   This  change  should have
        minimal impact since there  is no distinction between 'D'
        and 'E' type exponents in list-directed input or in D, E,
        F, and G formatted input.
      - In '77  mode, T, TL,  TR, and X output  formats no longer
        transmit  characters to  the output record  nor alter the
        record length; they merely  alter the current position in
        the  record.   This change  may invalidate  programs that
        relied on the old action  to create files of fixed length
        records.
      - List-directed  output  in '77  mode has  had a  number of
        changes:  double  precision values are now  output in the
        same  format  as  real  values,  except  more  digits may
        appear; the  fraction part of floating  point values will
        contain at least one digit;  a floating round rather than
        a fixed  round to decimal  is used (so,  for example, 0.1
        will print as 0.1  rather than as 0.099999999); character
        values   are  no   longer  separated   from  a  following
        noncharacter   value;  and   a  space   carriage  control
        character is  always supplied unless the  output unit has
        the 'carriage' attribute.

p-10. (10.2) Collected all of the MR10.2 FORTRAN runtime routines
      into  a  single bound_fortran_runtime_  which  replaces the
      previous  bound_fortran_io_.   This  segment  contains  all
      specific  FORTRAN  runtime  routines  and  runtime  support
      routines, and all routines written in FORTRAN.



Contents of MR10.2            3-57                        SRB10.2


p-11. (10.2) FORTRAN  programs may receive new  ERROR 2 messages,
      indicating  parameter  incompatability when  argument lists
      are inconsistent.  This is because FORTRAN now compares the
      argument  list of  subprogram references  with the argument
      list associated with the  entry definition (if one exists).
      Warning messages are provided when calling sequences do not
      match  what  the subprogram  expects.   Previously, FORTRAN
      used the first subprogram reference in a program/subprogram
      as the key to compare subsequent references with, this will
      still be done when no  entry definition can be found (i.e.,
      the subprogram is external).

p-12. (10.2) ANSI-77  FORTRAN programs that rely  on the transfer
      of control into the range of a DO - loop will now receive a
      severity  3 error  170.  This  is in  conformance with ANSI
      X3.9-1978 11.10.8..1

p-13. (10.2)    FORTRAN   now    recognizes   the   STATUS=DELETE
      specification in  the CLOSE statement for  any file that it
      has attached and opened.  Previously, one could only delete
      a  file  if  it  was CREATED  by  the  last  OPEN statement
      executed for that file.

      The fortran_io_ subroutine now  pads tape records on output
      (via tape_nstd_) to full word multiples.

p-14. (10.2)  The MR10.2  FORTRAN release  trims extraneous white
      space in list-directed output,  formats to simplify output,
      and  permits the  programmer to utilize  this output format
      without   extra   output    spacing   and   delays.    This
      simplification only affects programs running under ANSI-77;
      thus  existing  ANSI-66  programs  are  not  affected.  The
      statement:

           print *,"Number of steps:  ", integer

      produces the following ANSI-66 output:

           Number of steps:                 1

      and produces the following ANSI-77 output:

           Number of steps:  1












Contents of MR10.2            3-58                        SRB10.2


p-15. (10.2)   Added   features  to   FORTRAN  to   increase  its
      meterability,  and  extended  the  ability  to  use FORTRAN
      routines in MRDS.  A  slight improvement in execution speed
      for un-optimized compilations has also resulted.

      Added entry parameter descriptors  for all FORTRAN external
      entrypoints.   This   allows  MRDS/LINUS  to   use  FORTRAN
      routines as encode/decode procedures, etc.

      FORTRAN now supports the 'long_profile' feature, previously
      only  available  in  pl1.   This permits  the  user  to get
      measured real statistics of  program execution, timing, and
      page faulting.

      Enhanced   the  efficiency   of  loop   generation  in  the
      non-optimizing code generator to improve average efficiency
      and  prevent   situations  which  could   cause  efficiency
      degradation through loop word alignment.

p-16. (10.2)  Until  now,  a  FORTRAN control  argument  could be
      silently ignored  if a conflicting %global  was included in
      the source being compiled.  This problem is now eliminated.
      Control arguments now take precedence over %global.

      Subscriptrange, stringrange, and  the check_multiply option
      are now the default when "ansi77" is specified as a %global
      or control argument.  Previously,  these defaults were only
      set  for the  -ansi77 control argument,  thus leaving users
      with only  a %global ansi77 without  the defaults indicated
      in documentation.

      Every compilation  option now has a  converse option.  Thus
      every  %global can  be overriden  and almost  every control
      argument can be superceded by a subsequent argument.  Added
      the  following  new   user  options:   long,  default_full,
      full_optimize, no_check,  no_fold, no_line_numbers, no_map,
      no_optimize,   no_large_array,   no_very_large_array,   and
      no_vla_parm.  Renamed  the 'safe' option  to 'default_safe'
      which is now allowed as a control argument as well as being
      a legal  argument to %global and  %options.  Also added new
      control  arguments  to   correspond  to  existing  %global:
      -auto, -free, and -static.

p-17. (10.2) Changed the set_cc command  to set the defer newline
      mode  for  any  specified  FORTRAN  file  from  outside the
      FORTRAN program.


_F_o_r_u_m

      (10.0) Installed a new  Electronic Meetings facility, forum
      version 1.8.



Contents of MR10.2            3-59                        SRB10.2


q- 1. (10.0) Added a new forum command.  Forum is a sophisticated
      electronic  meeting  facility, which  has been  widely used
      internally  for over  a year.   It is  an outgrowth  of the
      experimental facility called continuum.

      Forum provides facilities for  a controlled meeting between
      widely dispersed people in both time and physical location.
      It allows users to  peruse chained transactions, respond to
      other  transactions, and  enter new  transactions.  It also
      provides control over who can create and attend meetings.

q- 2. (10.0) Added new commands to support Forum:

     forum_list_meetings, flsm
          lists meetings found in the user's forum search paths.

     forum_list_users, flsu
          lists users attending a particular meeting.

     forum_dir, fd
          displays  or returns  the pathname of  the default site
          meeting directory.

     forum_accept_notifications, fant
          notifies  the  user  when  transactions  are  added  to
          meetings in which the user has asked for notification.

     forum_refuse_notifications, frnt
          turns off forum notifications.

     forum_create, fcr
          creates a new meeting.

     forum_delete, fdl
          deletes an existing meeting.

     forum_add_participant, fapt
          adds person_ids to the ACL of a particular meeting.

     forum_remove_participant, frpt
          prevents   particular   person_ids  from   attending  a
          meeting.

     forum_add_project, fapj
          adds project_ids to the ACL of a particular meeting.

     forum_remove_project, frpj
          prevents members of a particular project from attending
          a meeting,  unless they are granted  specific access by
          their person_id.

     forum_make_public, fmp
          allows anyone to access a particular meeting.


Contents of MR10.2            3-60                        SRB10.2


     forum_unmake_public, fump
          requires  that  people attending  a meeting  be granted
          access by person_id or project_id.

     forum_admin
          performs site administration  functions associated with
          the Forum facility.

      For  further  details, refer  to  the Multics  Forum User's
      Guide, Order No.  CY74.

      (10.1)   Installed  Electronic   Meetings  facility,  forum
      version 1.9.

q- 3. (10.1)  Added  the  following  new  requests  to  the forum
      command:

     ox    delete_participant request to allow  a chairman to mark
          attendee records for deletion.
     ox    retrieve_participant   request   to   retrieve  deleted
          attendee records at any time prior to expunging.
     ox    expunge  request   to  allow  a   meeting  chairman  to
          physically   compact   meetings  by   removing  deleted
          transactions and participant records.

q- 4. (10.2)    Installed    forum    version    1.10.    Changed
      (incompatibly)  the qedx  and ted  commands to  require the
      write request  be explicitly given.  The  editors now query
      if the user attempts to quit with modified buffers.

      Replaced        the        forum_$forum_add_name        and
      forum_$forum_delete_name entries with forum_$chname_forum.

      Moved the  forum_chairman_$delete_forum entry to  forum_ so
      that  any  user with  modify  permission on  the containing
      directory can delete a meeting.

      Changed the definition of the restref transaction specifier
      to no longer include the current transaction.

      Added the  capability to allow authors  to delete their own
      transactions and to select transactions by date-time.


_G_C_O_S

      (10.0 and  10.1) Changed GCOS version  2.5 and GTSS version
      2.9 to correct several problems and add enhancements.







Contents of MR10.2            3-61                        SRB10.2


r- 1. (10.0) Added the -block (-bk)  control argument to the gcos
      command to specify, in words, the block size to be used for
      the gcos  tape buffer (NOTE:  This  requirement was removed
      in MR10.2.  See item p-8  below).  The default is 2800 with
      a  maximum  of 4096.   For  buffer sizes  greater  than the
      default    the    user    must    have    rw    access   to
      >sc1>rcp>workspace.acs.

r- 2. (10.0) Changed GCOS SYSOUT  routines to place printer/punch
      files  produced  by  the  batch  simulator  in  the  SYSOUT
      directory specified by the -syot_dir control argument.

r- 3. (10.0) Added the  help request to GCOS Daemon  to display a
      brief list of Daemon requests  available to the user.  Also
      fixed  Gcos  Daemon  to  resolve duplicate  SNUMB  names by
      querying the user rather than aborting.

r- 4. (10.0)  Added the  gcos_label_tape (gclt) tool  to the GCOS
      Environment  Simulator  to write  a GCOS  label on  a tape.
      Optionally,  gclt erases  the contents  of the  tape before
      writing the  label to provide an  added measure of security
      when  using  Multics  tapes  to transport  files  from GCOS
      systems to Multics systems for use under the Simulator.

r- 5. (10.1) Added  support of concurrent access  control for IDS
      II  applications run  under the  GCOS Environment Simulator
      gcos command.

r- 6. (10.1) Changed gcos tape buffer to allow use of block sizes
      greater than 2800 without rw access to workspace.acs.

r- 7. (10.2) Tape  density may now  be specified in  the gcos_fms
      command.






















Contents of MR10.2            3-62                        SRB10.2


r- 8. (10.2)  The  GCOS Environment  Simulator now  supports GCOS
      software release 4JS3 in both  batch and TSS.  This version
      of the simulator includes the latest update of 4JS3 (Update
      7) available.   Subsequent updates may be  installed by the
      site with the tools included  with the simulator.  The GCOS
      Environment Simulator, Order No.  AN05, should be consulted
      for  an updated  list of  those control  cards, MMEs, DRLs,
      GCOS features, and tools supported.

      The GCOS software includes  only the bundled GCOS software.
      For  example,  since all  GCOS  FORTRAN is  unbundled, this
      version  of  the simulator  does  not include  any FORTRAN.
      This version of the simulator includes tools, including the
      new  gcos_tss_build_library, which  can be  used to install
      separately obtained unbundled or updated GCOS software.

      The  GCOS  SRBs  for releases  from  4J to  4JS3  should be
      consulted  for changes  to the  GCOS software.   One of the
      incompatable  GCOS changes  is a  reformating of  H* and Q*
      files that  require the relinking  of all such  4J files to
      run in 4JS3.

      Removed  the  need  for  the  -block  control  argument  by
      increasing the  default tape buffer size  to the maximum of
      4096 words.

r- 9. (10.2) Added the gcos_tss_build_library command providing a
      tool  to  install GCOS  PSP software  for use  by gcos_tss.
      Type "help gtbl" for details.

r-10. (10.2) Changed the gcos_build_library, gcos_extract_module,
      and  gcos_library_summary gcos  tools to  no longer require
      specification  of  their  input library  format.   They can
      process either native GCOS or simulator format libraries.

r-11. (10.2)  Changed the  gcos_pull_tapefile command  to process
      tape density and tape buffer  (block) size, and changed the
      default buffer size to 3842 words.

















Contents of MR10.2            3-63                        SRB10.2


_G_r_a_p_h_i_c_s _F_a_c_i_l_i_t_y


s- 1. (10.2) Added the new  increment and synchronize commands to
      the graphics_editor to support dynamic operators.

      The  increment command  increments the  parameter values of
      the single  positional, modal, or  mapping terminal graphic
      element specified by <expern> <count> times with a delay of
      <delay> seconds between increments.

      The synchronize command forces  the graphics system to wait
      for  the  completion of  all previously  received increment
      commands.


_I_n_t_e_r_-_M_u_l_t_i_c_s _F_i_l_e _T_r_a_n_s_f_e_r _(_I_M_F_T_)

      (10.0) Installed  the initial release  of the Inter-Multics
      File Transfer (IMFT) facility.

t- 1. (10.0) Added  a new facility  to allow the  transmission of
      files  and  subtrees between  cooperating  Multics systems.
      The  initial release  does not provide  special support for
      the Access Isolation Mechanism (AIM).  The driver processes
      on  the  cooperating  systems  must  run  at  the  same AIM
      authorization to  insure proper operation.   Utilization of
      this  facility requires  cooperating systems  to have basic
      bisync and HASP protocol support.

t- 2. (10.0)     Added     the     following     new    commands:
      enter_imft_request   (eir),    cancel_imft_request   (cir),
      list_imft_requests  (lir),   and  move_imft_request  (mir).
      Refer  to  the  new  manual,  Inter-Multics  File  Transfer
      Facility Users' Guide (Order No.  CY73).

t- 3. (10.1)  Changed IMFT  to check  the user's  access to every
      file  and  directory in  a subtree.   Where the  user lacks
      access to a file or directory, the transfer does not occur;
      however the transfer of the subtree is continued.

t- 4. (10.1)  Changed IMFT  to never set  the ring  brackets of a
      file or directory it creates  on the target system, to less
      than the write bracket of the user's IMFT ACS segment.

t- 5. (10.1)  Changed IMFT  to properly  propagate AIM attributes
      between systems by:

     ox    determining maximum  access class of  branches that may
          be    transmitted    between    systems,    using   the
          system_privilege_ gate when appropriate




Contents of MR10.2            3-64                        SRB10.2


     ox    translating AIM access class  of each file or directory
          reloaded on the target system

     ox    refusing  to  transfer any  directory if  it has  to be
          created as an upgraded directory on the target system.

          NOTE:  IMFT for MR10.0  and MR10.1 are incompatible due
               to changes made for proper enforcement of AIM.  In
               order  to use  IMFT between  systems, both systems
               must either  be at the same  release level, or the
               MR10.1 system  must revert to use  of MR10.0 IMFT.
               That is,  the system running MR10.1  should save a
               copy of the MR10.0 IMFT (>unb>bound_imft_) for use
               when  communicating  with   another  system  still
               running MR10.0.

t- 6. (10.2)  Enhanced the  Inter-Multics File  Transfer facility
      (IMFT) to allow users to  request the transfer of files and
      subtrees from a remote system.  This feature is not enabled
      by default; the  keyword/value pair "allow_remote_requests=
      yes"  must  be included  (in  the definition  of  the input
      driver in the I/O Daemon  tables on the foreign system) for
      such requests to be honored.

      By default, requests for  remote transfer are restricted to
      files  and subtrees  whose ACLs  contain a  term explicitly
      granting access to the Person_id  of the IMFT daemon.  This
      restriction can  be overridden by the  specification of the
      keyword/value pair "explicit_access= no" (in the definition
      of the output driver in the I/O Daemon tables on the system
      where the files originate).

      Changed (incompatibly) the meaning of  the ACL modes on the
      access control segment (ACS) used  by IMFT to determine the
      foreign  user's  privileges;  "w"  access  now  allows  the
      foreign  user to  send files to  the local  system, and "r"
      access allows  the foreign user to  request the transfer of
      files from the local system.   A tool is provided to adjust
      access  to  the  ACSs  and  is  documented  in  the  MR10.2
      Installation Instructions.

      The  definition  of  an  output  driver  must  now  include
      specification of either one or two minor devices.  Separate
      minor  devices are  used to  transfer files  to the foreign
      site and to request the  transfer of files from the foreign
      site.   (Refer  to  Inter-Multics  File  Transfer  Facility
      Reference Manual, Order No.  CY73 for details.)








Contents of MR10.2            3-65                        SRB10.2


t- 7. (10.2)  Changed  the  IMFT  facility to  allow  the  use of
      communications methods other than  HASP.  For example, X.25
      and ordinary  asynchronous links are now  supported.  If it
      is  desired to  transfer files  between a  site running the
      10.2 version and  a site running the 10.1  version of IMFT,
      the keyword/value  pair "version= 2.0" must  be included in
      the  args  statement of  the device  definition in  the I/O
      daemon tables at the 10.2 site.


_L_o_g_i_c_a_l _I_n_q_u_i_r_y _U_p_d_a_t_e _S_y_s_t_e_m _(_L_I_N_U_S_)

      (10.1)  Installed LINUS  version 4.0  to fix  several known
      errors.

u- 1. (10.1) Changed LINUS to  use the subsystem utilities, ssu_,
      causing  it  to  more  closely resemble  the  read_mail and
      send_mail     subsystems.     There     are    two    minor
      incompatibilities;  the  execute, e,  and ".."   methods of
      sending a  command to the  command processor are  no longer
      identical, and the comma  (,) and semi-colon (;) characters
      now have  special meanings and  must be enclosed  in quotes
      when used in a LINUS request line.

u- 2. (10.1)  Added  subsystem  start_up exec_coms  to  the LINUS
      subsystem,  version  4.0.  The  start_up,  start_up.lec, is
      searched  for  in the  user's  home directory,  the project
      directory, and the >site.   This feature is controlled with
      the -start_up (default) and -no_start_up control arguments.

      (10.2)  Installed LINUS  version 4.4  to fix  several known
      errors and add several new features.

u- 3. (10.2)  Added  the apply,  qedx,  input_query, print_query,
      save_query,   and   check_query   LINUS   requests   as  an
      alternative   to   the   LILA  editor.    The   LINUS  data
      manipulation  requests (store,  modify, delete,  and print)
      now automatically translate the current  query if it is not
      already done.
















Contents of MR10.2            3-66                        SRB10.2


u- 4. (10.2)  Added  a  report  writer  to  the  LINUS subsystem.
      Features include:   1) sorting output,  2) column headings,
      3)  totaling   across  columns  and  down   rows,  4)  user
      controlled   page  breaks,   headings,  and   footings,  5)
      hyphenation, 6)  new column title folding  action, 7) group
      header and footer, 8) group  header and footer triggers, 9)
      counts  and  sub-counts,  10)  control  arguments  for  the
      display request,  11) multiple pass  report formatting, and
      12) new display built-in values.

      Added the display, set_format_options, list_format_options,
      restore_format_options,  save_format_options, column_value,
      page_number, picture, and format_line requests to implement
      the LINUS report writer interface.

      The scrolling  feature of the LINUS  Report Writer includes
      the following functions:  1) forward scrolling, 2) backward
      scrolling, 3) left scrolling,  4) right scrolling, 5) help,
      6)  binding  scrolling function  to  keys, 7)  changing the
      scroll height,  8) changing the scroll  width, 9) quitting,
      10) redisplay of screen, 11) goto start of report, 12) goto
      end  of report,  13) multics  mode, and  14) goto line/page
      within the report.


_M_e_n_u _F_a_c_i_l_i_t_y


v- 1. (10.0) Added new subroutine interfaces  to allow a COBOL or
      FORTRAN  programmer to  create, store,  retrieve, list, and
      display  menu  objects.  These  new subroutines  are called
      cb_menu_ and ft_menu_, respectively.

v- 2. (10.0)  Added  subroutine  interfaces  to  allow  COBOL  or
      FORTRAN  programs  to enable,  manipulate, and  disable the
      "windows" in which menus  are displayed.  These subroutines
      are called cb_window_ and  ft_window_, respectively.  For a
      description  of these  new subroutines,  refer to  the Menu
      Creation Facilities manual (Order No.  CP51).

v- 3. (10.2)  Expanded  descriptions of  Multics  System Software
      Extensions  (Priced  Software  Product  (PSP)  SGE6800)  to
      include the Multics Menu Manager Facility and Video System,
      formerly PSP SGD6805.


_M_R_D_S


w- 1. (10.0) Changed MRDS to fix several known errors.





Contents of MR10.2            3-67                        SRB10.2


w- 2. (10.1)  Changed MRDS  to allow data  base administrators to
      restructure  existing  data  bases  through  use  of  a new
      restructure_mrds_db   command.    This  command   enters  a
      subsystem with the following requests:

     ox    create_index  request to  create a  secondary index for
          the attribute in the relation.
     ox    create_relation request  to create a new  relation in a
          data base.
     ox    delete_index  to  remove  the secondary  index  for the
          attribute in the relation.
     ox    delete_relation request  to delete a  relation from the
          data base.
     ox    display_data_model   request   to  display   the  model
          definition  of  the MRDS  data base,  including domain,
          attribute, and relation information.
     ox    free_db request to free the data base currently readied
          by  the  restructuring  subsystem  from  the subsystem.
          This allows the data base to  be opened by any user and
          prevents  further  restructuring  requests  against the
          data base.
     ox    ready_db   request   to   ready   a   data   base   for
          restructuring.

w- 3. (10.2) WARNING:   Deleted the bound_mrds_v1_  segment which
      has been obsolete since MR8.2.   Any existing v3 data bases
      must   be   converted   to   v4   data   bases   using  the
      update_mrds_db_version command prior  to installing MR10.2.
      The  umdbv   command  is  not  available   with  MR10.2  or
      subsequent releases.


_W_O_R_D_P_R_O _C_o_m_p_r_e_h_e_n_s_i_v_e _F_a_c_i_l_i_t_y


x- 1. (10.1) Changed the default search list for compose to:

           -working_dir
           >udd>[user project]>compose_macros
           -referencing_dir
           >unb

x- 2. (10.1)   Installed   compose  version   9.12n   to  enhance
      performance  by  no  longer  compressing  strings  of space
      characters   into  equivalent   horizontal  tab  characters
      according to standard Multics  tab settings.  Compout files
      intended for  output on a line  printer are slightly longer
      and  the  results  of  compare_ascii  between  old  and new
      compout  files  show  many  apparent  errors.   To compress
      blanks  in  a  compout  file  or  other  segment,  use  the
      canonicalize command:

          canonicalize <path> -tabs -every 10


Contents of MR10.2            3-68                        SRB10.2


x- 3. (10.1)  Installed ted  command, version 3.0o,  to provide a
      new buffer manipulation strategy.

      The  new   strategy  makes  better  use   of  segments  and
      significantly reduces the amount  of modified pages in disk
      queues.

      SAFE environments  from a previous  release of ted  are not
      restartable  with  the  new  version.   An  old  version is
      available in >unb>old_ted to allow users to restart any old
      SAFE environments.

x- 4. (10.1) Installed  the ted requests  |ax, |cx, |ix  to allow
      speedtype expansion for appended lines.  Added the |comment
      request  to  aid  in  commenting PL1  programs.   Added the
      |dumpl, |dumps, |dumpvs, |dump requests to allow dumping of
      selected lines in octal.






































Contents of MR10.2            3-69                        SRB10.2








                            SECTION 4


                      INCOMPATIBLE CHANGES




_S_T_O_R_A_G_E _S_Y_S_T_E_M


A- 1. (10.2)    Changed    the    consolidated_volume_dump    and
      complete_volume_dump  commands  by removing  the -no_detach
      control argument.

A- 2. (10.2) Upgraded  the manage_volume_pool command  to support
      volume sets and expiration dates.   USE of this new version
      of  the command  IRREVOCABLY CHANGES  the structure  of the
      volume  pool   segment.   Type  "help   mvp"  for  detailed
      information.


_A_N_S_W_E_R_I_N_G _S_E_R_V_I_C_E _A_N_D _S_Y_S_T_E_M _A_D_M_I_N_I_S_T_R_A_T_I_O_N


C- 1. (10.0)  Changed  the  access  required  to  install  system
      tables.  Installation of the cdt, mgt, rtdt, and sat tables
      is  controlled by  the submitters'  effective access  to an
      access  control  segment,  <table_name>.install.acs.  These
      access control  segments MUST reside  in >system_control_1.
      This change allows site  personnel to restrict write access
      to the actual tables so  that persons authorized to install
      the tables cannot accidentally modify them.

C- 2. (10.1)  Renamed  the  admin  subroutine  to  admin_.   This
      subroutine  processes many  operator commands.   Sites that
      have exec_coms (such as system_start_up.ec, admin.ec, etc.)
      that contain commands of  the form "admin$xxx" MUST replace
      them with commands of the form "sc_command xxx".

C- 3. (10.0) The Answering Service no longer creates missing home
      directories  when  a  user  logs  in.   If  a  user's  home
      directory is deleted or  missing, the Project Administrator
      must create the directory.  The Answering Service continues
      to create home directories when a  user is added to the PDT
      for a project.



Incompatible Changes           4-1                        SRB10.2


_P_R_O_C_E_S_S _E_N_V_I_R_O_N_M_E_N_T


D- 1. (10.1)  Changed  the  name  of  the  supervisor  gate  from
      xhcs_$get_stack_ptr   to    hcs_$set_stack_ptr.    Programs
      calling  xhcs_$get_stack_ptr  should  be  updated  to  call
      hcs_$get_stack_ptr.

D- 2. (10.1)  Changed  the link_trap_caller_  subroutine  to call
      trap procedures with  a null pointer for a  0 arg link relp
      rather than a pointer to the base of the linkage section.

D- 3. (10.2)  Moved   the  pl1_operators  segment   for  programs
      compiled  with the  Version 1  PL/1 compiler  to >obsolete.
      User  programs  which  have  not been  compiled  since 1972
      should be recompiled.


_S_Y_S_T_E_M _P_R_O_G_R_A_M_M_I_N_G _A_N_D _L_I_B_R_A_R_Y _M_A_I_N_T_E_N_A_N_C_E


E- 1. (10.1)  Changed the  format of the  MST header.   To make a
      system  tape  using the  new  header you  MUST use  the new
      generate_mst  command.  The  new generator  can be  used to
      generate tapes for preceeding  releases of both Multics and
      BOS.

E- 2. (10.1) Enhanced the check_mst  command to detect and report
      overflows  of the  hardcore linkage  segments, definitions,
      and  name table.   The enhanced  check_mst MUST  be used to
      check  tapes prepared  with the new  header and  may NOT be
      used to check tapes prepared  with a header from a previous
      release.  The enhanced check_mst displays error messages on
      error_output and sets a severity indicator (accessed by the
      severity  active function).   Removed the  addname ckm from
      the  check_mst tool.   The enhanced  check_mst can  only be
      used  to  check  tapes  generated by  the  new generate_mst
      command.  To check tapes  generated in earlier releases use
      the >obs>check_mst command.

E- 3. (10.0) Changed the get_library_segment command to no longer
      search >ldd>auth_maint by default.   Sites that have a need
      for such  a directory should  not delete the  links in >ldd
      for auth_maint.control and should retain the control files.
      Sites    that    do    not   have    a    directory   named
      >documentation>iml_info_segments  are encouraged  to create
      the directory  and use it for  site specific info segments.
      The  existance of  this directory is  known by  many of the
      standard library commands.






Incompatible Changes           4-2                        SRB10.2


E- 4. (10.1)  Replaced  the  add_copyright  and copyright_archive
      commands   with  the   new  add_pnotice,  generate_pnotice,
      list_pnotice_names, and display_pnotice commands to provide
      compliance  with  new software  protection  rules.  Deleted
      >tools>bound_copyright_  which contained  the add_copyright
      command,     copyright_archive     command,     and     the
      copyright_notice_ subroutine.

E- 5. (10.1)  Changed  the cv_cmf,  cv_pmf, cv_rtmf,  cv_smf, and
      cv_ttf   translators   to  process   segments   having  the
      appropriate  suffix.   The respective  suffixes  are:  cmf,
      pmf, rtmf,  smf, and ttf.   The cv_XXX command  first looks
      for the  segment source.XXX, and  if found, the  segment is
      translated  and  the output  placed in  source.TABLE, where
      TABLE is the appropriate suffix.   If the source segment is
      not found,  the command looks  for the segment  source.  If
      found,  a  warning message  is  issued and  the  segment is
      converted as with prior  releases.  This compatibility will
      be  removed  in a  future release.   Project administrators
      should   rename  their   PMF  segments  or   add  the  name
      <Project>.pmf to  existing segments so there  is no need to
      change typing habits or exec_coms.

      Updated the master.ec supplied in >tools to inspect the pmf
      archive for  Project.pmf.  Sites should  make corresponding
      changes  to  their   master.ec  segment.   The  undelegated
      project  PMF  repository,  >udd>SysAdmin>admin>pmf.archive,
      MUST be converted so that PMFs have new format names before
      using  the  new  master.ec  for  administrative  work.  The
      conversion may be accomplished by typing the command:

           exec_com >tools>util convert_mr10.1_pmfs

      If  a site  must revert  to MR10.0,  the conversion  may be
      accomplished in a SysAdmin process by typing the command:

           exec_com >tools>util revert_mr10.0_pmfs

      These  commands  result in  an  existing pmf  archive being
      renamed and  a new archive being  constructed with suitably
      named components using a temporary directory.  The exec_com
      provides additional documentation.

E- 6. (10.1)  Changed  the  cv_cmf, cv_pmf,  cv_rtmf,  and cv_ttf
      translators  to no  longer delete  the output  segment just
      because translation failed.  Users  should use the severity
      active  function  to  determine whether  a  translation was
      successful.

E- 7. (10.1)  Deleted the  merge_mst command.   All Multics tapes
      should be made with the generate_mst command.




Incompatible Changes           4-3                        SRB10.2


_T_A_P_E _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E


F- 1. (10.1) Moved the ntape_ I/O module to the obsolete library.
      Sites should use tape_nstd_.


_O_T_H_E_R _O_N_L_I_N_E _L_I_B_R_A_R_Y _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E


G- 1. (10.1)  Changed  the  sort_seg  command  to  provide better
      protection from accidental sorting of segments.  If neither
      the  -replace  nor  -segment control  arguments  are given,
      sort_seg asks if the user really wants to replace the input
      segment with  a sorted version.   This may cause  some user
      exec_coms to ask questions that had not been asked in prior
      releases.   The  question  may  be  avoided  by  using  the
      -replace  control argument  to explicitly  request that the
      input segment be replaced by its sorted contents.

G- 2. (10.1) Changed the create_dir command to set directory ring
      brackets to 7,7 by default.   The default can be overridden
      by   using   the  -ring_brackets   control   argument  with
      create_dir.

G- 3. (10.1) Changed the who command to no longer list daemons by
      default.   The  -daemon control  argument  MUST be  used to
      display daemon processes.  Added  the -all control argument
      to list daemon, absentee, and interactive users.

G- 4. (10.2) Changed the qedx quit request to query the user if a
      modified buffer  exists at the time  the request is issued.
      Any  exec_coms required  to quit  unconditionally from qedx
      invocations should be changed to use the either the Q or qf
      request.

      This is a major incompatible change and the site may choose
      to  disable  this  query completely.   To  accomplish this,
      change line 1486 of qedx.pl1 from:

         local_qi.header.query_if_modified = "1"b;

      to:

         local_qi.header.query_if_modified = "0"b;

G- 5. (10.2) Changed  Version 2 exec_com &set  statement to strip
      quotes  from its  arguments, the way  the command processor
      does,  making  a &set  line work  like a  value_set command
      line.





Incompatible Changes           4-4                        SRB10.2


G- 6. (10.2) Changed the trace command to produce meters that may
      not be  compared to meters as  reported by the trace_meters
      command in prior releases.

G- 7. (10.2) Changed the abbreviation  processor to recognize the
      archive  component  pathname  delimiter  (::)  as  a  break
      sequence.   As  a  consequence  of this  change,  abbrev no
      longer  expands  any  abbreviation  whose  name  contains a
      double colon.  Added the .rename request to abbrev to allow
      users to rename any such  abbreviations so they are able to
      continue to use them.

G- 8. (10.2)  Deleted the  subsystem_utils_ subroutine.  Programs
      which  used the  subsystem_utils_ must now  be converted to
      use  the  new ssu_  utilities  which are  described  in the
      Programmer's Reference  Manual and the  Subroutines and I/O
      Manual.

G- 9. Changed tape_archive to  use a version 4 table  that is not
      compatible  with  older   versions  of  tape_archive.   The
      >obs>tape_archive command  must be used when  making a tape
      to  be sent  to a site  which has not  installed the MR10.2
      tape_archive command.


_E_X_T_E_N_D_E_D _M_A_I_L _F_A_C_I_L_I_T_Y


H- 1. (10.1)  Changed  how  send_mail  fills  a  messge  to  make
      send_mail  more  compatible   with  forum.   These  changes
      include:

     ox    changed  the default  of terminal  input to  -fill, the
          default of file input is left unchanged as -no_fill.

     ox    filling,  if  enabled, takes  place after  exiting qedx
          during initial input rather  than before entering qedx.
          This  eliminates  the  previous  behavior  of send_mail
          where the user's qedx  editing request would often fail
          as  the message  in the  editor's buffer  was formatted
          differently from what was visible to the user.

     ox    filling, if enabled, occurs automatically following the
          execution  of  any qedx  or  apply request.   Added the
          -fill  and -no_fill  control arguments to  the qedx and
          apply  request to  allow the user  to control automatic
          filling.

H- 2. (10.1)   Changed  the   -input_file  control   argument  in
      send_mail to imply the -request_loop control argument.





Incompatible Changes           4-5                        SRB10.2


H- 3. (10.1) Changed  the read_mail command to  query the user if
      an attempt is  made to delete a message  which has not been
      listed,  printed,  saved, or  written.  The  -force control
      argument for the delete request may be used to suppress the
      query.   The  query is  an  incompatible change  from prior
      releases of read_mail.

H- 4. (10.1)  Changed   read_mail  and  print_mail   to  issue  a
      reset_more control  order after displaying  each message to
      allow users of video systems to easily abort the display of
      a single message when displaying several messages.  This is
      an incompatible change from prior releases of read_mail.

H- 5. (10.1) Changed the way read_mail and print_mail interpret a
      noncontrol  argument  used to  specify  the mailbox  on the
      command  line.   The  argument   is  first  interpreted  as
      -mailbox STR; if  no mailbox is found it  is interpreted as
      -save  STR; if  no savebox  is found  it is  interpreted as
      -user STR.

H- 6. (10.1)  Added the  -prompt STR,  -no_prompt, -include_self,
      and  -no_include_self   control  arguments  to   the  reply
      request.   The -no_include_self  default prevents  the user
      from receiving a copy of  the reply without taking specific
      action.  This  constitutes an incompatible  change with the
      previous release of read_mail.

H- 7. (10.2)  Changed  send_mail  qedx  to  require  a  write (w)
      request to reflect any changes  made to the message back to
      send_mail.   The  quit  (q)   request  no  longer  does  an
      automatic update.   If the quit  request is issued  and the
      message has  been modified since it  was last written, qedx
      will now  query for permission  to exit.  If  permission is
      given, any  changes made since the  last write request will
      be  lost.  The  new quit-force (Q)  request may  be used to
      abort  unwanted  editing  of   the  message  without  being
      queried.


_F_O_R_U_M


I- 1. (10.2) Installed forum version  1.10.  Changed the qedx and
      ted  commands to  require the  write request  be explicitly
      given.  The editors now query  if the user attempts to quit
      with modified buffers.









Incompatible Changes           4-6                        SRB10.2


_F_O_R_T_R_A_N


J- 1. (10.0)  Changed the  fortran compiler to  make -table (-tb)
      the  default  control  argument  except  when  -optimize is
      specified.   When  the  -optimize  control  argument  is in
      effect,  the  default  is  -no_table  (-ntb).   This change
      automatically produces a symbol table, making it easier for
      programmers to debug FORTRAN  programs.  However, users who
      are compiling  FORTRAN programs for  production runs should
      be warned to  use -optimize to avoid the  symbol table (and
      incidentally,   to   gain   the   significant   performance
      improvements of optimization).

J- 2. (10.0) Changed the defaults for nonoptimized compilation in
      ansi77  mode to  be -subscriptrange  (-subrg), -stringrange
      (-strg),  and  -check_multiply   (-ckmpy).   There  are  no
      changes  effecting  ansi66  mode  for  these  three control
      arguments  (-no_check_multiply  is the  default  for ansi66
      mode).  These control arguments  can be overridden by their
      respective   negative   control   arguments,   which   are:
      -no_subscriptrange (-nsubrg), -no_stringrange (-nstrg), and
      -no_check_multiply (-nckmpy).


_I_N_T_E_R_-_M_U_L_T_I_C_S _F_I_L_E _T_R_A_N_S_F_E_R _(_I_M_F_T_)


K- 1. IMFT for MR10.0 and MR10.1  are incompatible due to changes
      made for proper  enforcement of AIM.  In order  to use IMFT
      between systems,  both systems must  either be at  the same
      release level, or  the MR10.1 system must revert  to use of
      MR10.0  IMFT.  That  is, the  system running  MR10.1 should
      save a  copy of the MR10.0  IMFT (>unb>bound_imft_) for use
      when  communicating  with   another  system  still  running
      MR10.0.

K- 2. (10.2) Changed the  meaning of the ACL modes  on the access
      control segment (ACS) used by IMFT to determine the foreign
      user's privileges;  "w" access now allows  the foreign user
      to send  files to the  local system, and  "r" access allows
      the foreign user to request  the transfer of files from the
      local  system.  Users  are advised  to change  all terms on
      these ACSs,  that currently give  "r" access, to  give both
      "r" and "w".










Incompatible Changes           4-7                        SRB10.2


_M_R_D_S

      (10.2)  Deleted the  bound_mrds_v1_ segment  which has been
      obsolete  since MR8.2.   The update_mrds_db_version (umdbv)
      command is not available  in MR10.2 or subsequent releases.
      Any  existing  v1 data  bases must  be converted  using the
      update_mrds_db_version (umdbv) command  prior to installing
      MR10.2.


_W_O_R_D_P_R_O _C_O_M_P_R_E_H_E_N_S_I_V_E _F_A_C_I_L_I_T_Y


L- 1. (10.1) Changed the default search list for compose to:

           -working_dir
           >udd>[user project]>compose_macros
           -referencing_dir
           >unb

L- 2. (10.1)   Enhanced   compose   performance   by   no  longer
      compressing strings of space characters into equivalent HTs
      according to standard Multics  tab settings.  Compout files
      intended for  output on a line  printer are slightly longer
      and  the  results  of  compare_ascii  between  old  and new
      compout  files  show  many  apparent  errors.   To compress
      blanks  in  a  compout  file  or  other  segment,  use  the
      canonicalize command:

          canonicalize <path> -tabs -every 10

L- 3. (10.1) SAFE environments from a previous release of ted are
      not restartable  with the new  version.  An old  version is
      available in >unb>old_ted to allow users to restart any old
      SAFE environments.




















Incompatible Changes           4-8                        SRB10.2








                           APPENDIX A


                    COMMANDS AND SUBROUTINES




      This is  a partial listing of  new commands and subroutines
      for MR10.0, MR10.1, and MR10.2.  A brief description of the
      command and subroutine functionality is included.  Refer to
      info   segments  or   the  appropriate   manuals  for  more
      information.


_N_E_W _C_O_M_M_A_N_D_S

add_pnotice
     (10.1)  adds a  copyright or  trade secret  notice to source
     programs.

analyze_multics
     (10.2) invokes  a subsystem that  will permit scanning  of a
     Multics address space for analysis.

cancel_imft_request
     (10.0)  allows  cancellation  of  requests  made  using  the
     enter_imft_request command.

cancel_output_request
     (10.0)allows  cancellation   of  requests  made   using  the
     enter_output_request command.

compare_configuration_deck
     (10.0) allows maintenance of configuration decks.

compare_pl1.ec
     (10.1) compares PL/1 source programs of dissimilar formats.

component
     (10.0) returns the archive component name part of an archive
     pathname.

cv_links_to_mail_table
     (10.2) attempts to incorporate  information from the mailbox
     links directory into the Mail Table.



Commands and Subroutines       A-1                        SRB10.2


describe_psp
     (10.1)  returns  information  about  products  based  on the
     marketing identifier.

dial_out
     (10.0)   allows   access  to   a   remote  system   via  the
     dial_manager_ subroutine and Multics CS autocall channels.

display_cdt
     (10.0) allows an authorized user  to display the contents of
     the Channel Definition Table (CDT).

display_fnp_idle
     (10.0)  displays  data  accumulated  by  the  meter_fnp_idle
     command.

display_pnotice
     (10.1)  provides  information on  copyright or  trade secret
     notices contained in source programs.

enter_imft_request
     (10.0)  enters requests  to the  Inter-Multics File Transfer
     facility.

enter_output_request
     (10.0) enters  requests for output  and allows nonpositional
     control arguments, star convention, and user-defined request
     types.

entry_path
     (10.0) returns the directory name  and entryname parts of an
     archive pathname.

explain_doc
     (10.2)  returns  information  about  a  manual  specified by
     manual name, short name, or order number.

forum
     (10.1) invokes the new electronic meeting facility.

forum_accept_notifications
     (10.1) allows the user to  be notified when transactions are
     added  to   meetings  in  which  the   user  has  asked  for
     notifications.

forum_add_participant
     (10.1) adds person_ids to the ACL of a particular meeting.

forum_add_project
     (10.1) adds project_ids to the ACL of a particular meeting.





Commands and Subroutines       A-2                        SRB10.2


forum_admin
     (10.1)  performs  site  administration  functions associated
     with the forum facility.

forum_create
     (10.1) creates a new meeting.

forum_delete
     (10.1) deletes an existing meeting.

forum_dir
     (10.1) displays or returns the  pathname of the default site
     meeting directory.

forum_list_meetings
     (10.1)  lists  meetings  found  in the  user's  forum search
     paths.

forum_list_users
     (10.1) lists users attending a particular meeting.

forum_make_public
     (10.1) allows anyone to access a particular meeting.

forum_refuse_notifications
     (10.1) turns off forum notifications.

forum_remove_participant
     (10.1)  prevents  particular  person_ids  from  attending  a
     meeting.

forum_remove_project
     (10.1)  prevents  members  of   a  particular  project  from
     attending a meeting, unless they are granted specific access
     by person_id.

forum_unmake_public
     (10.1) requires  that people attending a  meeting be granted
     access by person_id or project_id.

gcos_label_tape
     (10.0) writes a GCOS standard tape label on a tape.

gcos_tss_build_library
     (10.2) provides a tool for  installing GCOS PSP software for
     use by gcos_tss.

have_messages
     (10.1) prints  "You have messages" if  there are interactive
     messages in the default, or  user specified, mailbox and "No
     messages"  if  there  are  no  interactive  messages  in the
     default, or user specified, mailbox.



Commands and Subroutines       A-3                        SRB10.2


hc_pf_meters
     (10.0) displays the number of  page faults taken on hardcore
     segments.

is_component_pathname
     (10.0)  tests a  pathname to  see whether  it is  an archive
     pathname.

list_imft_requests
     (10.0) lists  requests entered using  the enter_imft_request
     command.

list_output_requests
     (10.0) lists requests entered using the enter_output_request
     command.

login_args
     (10.0) displays or returns  information about selected login
     arguments.

meter_fnp_idle
     (10.0) records FNP idle time at specifiable intervals.

move_imft_request
     (10.0)   moves   IMFT  requests   between  queues   or  IMFT
     destinations.

move_output_request
     (10.0)  moves  output  requests  between  queues  or request
     types.

peruse_crossref
     (10.0)  displays selected  information from  the output from
     the cross_reference command.

reconnect_ec_enable
     (10.1) causes a reconnect.ec  exec_com to be executed during
     reconnection to a disconnected process.

reconnect_ec_disable
     (10.1)   disables   uses    of   the   reconnect.ec   during
     reconnection.

restructure_mrds_db
     (10.1)  causes  the  invoking  process  to  enter  the  MRDS
     restructuring subsystem.   If the optional  db_path argument
     is given, that data base is quiesced.

scavenge_vol
     (10.1) invokes the Scavenger to salvage one physical volume.
     The  Scavenger   examines  and  evaluates   VTOCEs,  deletes
     per-process and per-bootload VTOCEs from previous bootloads,
     recovers lost VTOCEs, and  recovers lost records.  A storage


Commands and Subroutines       A-4                        SRB10.2


     system volume may scavenged while  it is online and attached
     to user processes.

set_system_console
     causes  a console,  previously marked INOP  and removed from
     service, to be brought back on line.

set_x25_packet_threshold
     (10.2) allows users with hphcs_ access to alter the value of
     the parameter  on a running multiplexer.   This command sets
     the  minimum size  of X.25  long packets  which are  given a
     lower priority than short packets.

set_mc_message_limits
     (10.1)  controls  the printing  of  messages by  the message
     coordinator.  The system administrator  can control the size
     of the burst  and duration of the pause  between bursts with
     this command.

shortest_path
     (10.2)  returns  the  result  of  get_shortest_path_  on the
     target pathname.

signal
     (10.0) allows the user to test signalling of conditions from
     command level.

strip_component
     (10.0) removes the suffix from the archive component portion
     of an archive pathname.

total_output_requests
     (10.0) counts total requests in one or more output queues.

trace_mcs
     (10.0) displays Multics CS  trace table entries and controls
     operation of the CS trace facility.

tutorial
     (10.2) invokes  a menu-driven introduction  to Multics which
     can be used to learn basic features of the Multics system.

vtoc_buffer_meters
     (10.1) provides information about  the utilization of Volume
     Table of Contents (VTOC) buffers.

where_doc
     (10.2)   returns   the  name   of  manual(s)   that  contain
     information about a specified topic_name where topic_name is
     a topic, command, subroutine, or I/O module.





Commands and Subroutines       A-5                        SRB10.2


_N_E_W _S_U_B_R_O_U_T_I_N_E_S

cb_menu_
     (10.0) supports use of menus from COBOL programs.

cb_window_
     (10.0) supports use of the Video System from COBOL programs.

compute_common_aim_ceiling_
     (10.1)  computes the  maximum authorization  or access class
     which  is in  common between  two Multics  systems given the
     definitions of their AIM attributes.

cv_error_$name
     (10.0) converts an error name to an error code.

ft_menu_
     (10.0) supports use of menus from FORTRAN programs.

ft_window_
     (10.0)  supports  use  of  the  Video  System  from  FORTRAN
     programs.

get_ec_version_
     (10.0)  returns the  version number  of an  exec_com and the
     character position of the first character after the &version
     statement, if any.

get_system_aim_attributes_
     (10.1)  returns  a structure  describing the  AIM attributes
     defined on the host system.

hcs_$validate_process_id
     (10.1) validates that a  process identifier corresponds to a
     process which is active.

initiate_file_$create
     (10.2)  initiates  a  segment,  or  creates  a  segment,  if
     necessary.

iox_$close_file
     (10.2) allows a close description.

iox_$detach
     (10.2) allows a detach description.

iox_$open_file
     (10.2)  allows an  open description with  file attribute and
     positioning information.

mlr_
     (10.2) provides access to respective hardware instructions.



Commands and Subroutines       A-6                        SRB10.2


mrl_
     (10.2) provides access to respective hardware instructions.

mvt_
     (10.1) provides extremely efficient translation of character
     strings  using translations  which are not  known at compile
     time.

qedx_
     (10.2) provides a subroutine interface to the qedx editor.

sort_seg_
     (10.1)  provides   entrypoints  for  sorting   segments  and
     character strings.

ssu_
     (10.1) provides support routines for writing subsystems.

system_info_$version_id
     (10.2)  returns the  version_id obtained from  the MULT tape
     via active_all_rings_data.

tape_ioi_
     (10.1) provides facility for complete management of the ioi_
     workspace, a comprehensive set of order commands, read_ahead
     and write_behind,  standard error recovery,  error reporting
     in English, and supports all  tape drives on Multics with an
     interface that is independent of  the model tape drive being
     used.

timed_io_
     (10.1) allows a program to  regain control when IO operation
     takes longer than a specified amount of time.

translate_aim_attributes_
     (10.1) translates the AIM  attributes in an authorization or
     access  class  from  one   system's  definition  to  another
     system's definition where possible.

















Commands and Subroutines       A-7                        SRB10.2








                           APPENDIX B


                MULTICS PRICED SOFTWARE PRODUCTS




PRODUCT
NUMBER           TITLE


_M_R_1_0_._1 _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E


_M_R_1_0_._0 _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E

SGC6822          Multics Communications Support for X.25
SGC6823          Inter Multics File Transfer Facility
SGC6824          Multics Forum Facility


_O_P_E_R_A_T_I_N_G _S_Y_S_T_E_M _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E

SGS6800          Multics Operating System EXEC (see Note 1 below)
SGS6801          GCOS (III) Timesharing Environment Facility
SGS6802          Transaction Processing Tools
SGS6803          FAST/DFAST (Fast Access System for Timesharing)
SGS6804          GCOS (III) Batch Environment Facility
                   (see Note 1)


_O_P_E_R_A_T_I_N_G _S_Y_S_T_E_M _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E _E_X_T_E_N_S_I_O_N_S

SGC6823          Inter Multics File Transfer Facility
SGE6800          Multics System Software Extensions (see Note 4)
SGE6802          Remote Job Entry Facility


_C_O_M_M_U_N_I_C_A_T_I_O_N_S _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E

SGC6800          Multics Communications System (Multics CS)
SGC6801          Autocall Support Option to Multics CS
SGC6802          3270 Support Option to Multics CS
SGC6803          Basic Bisync Support Option to Multics CS
SGC6804          G115 Support Option to Multics CS
SGC6805          File Transfer Facility


Priced Software                B-1                        SRB10.2


SGC6806          Network Tools (see Note 5)
SGC6807          Multics HASP Facility
SGC6822          Multics Communications Support for X.25


_P_R_O_G_R_A_M_M_I_N_G _L_A_N_G_U_A_G_E _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E

SGL6801          FORTRAN Compiler and Runtime Facility
SGL6802          Basic Compiler and Runtime Facility
SGL6803          COBOL-74 Compiler and Runtime Facility
SGL6805          MRPG (Report Generator) Facility
SGL6806          APL (Version 5.02)


_O_P_E_R_A_T_I_N_G _S_Y_S_T_E_M _U_T_I_L_I_T_I_E_S _A_N_D _T_O_O_L_S

SGD6806          Executive Mail System
SGD6807          Format Document Facility
SGU6800          WORDPRO Comprehensive Facility
SGU6801          SORT/MERGE Facility
SGU6803          LISTER Facility
SGU6804          SPEEDTYPE Facility
SGU6805          Dictionary Tools
SGU6807          Extended Mail Facility
SGU6820          WORDPRO Text Formatter
SGU6821          Mergenthaler VIP Device Support Option
                 Option to Compose
SGU6833          TED (Text Editor)
SGU6834          Emacs Text Processing Facility
SGU6835          Offline Page Printing System Support Facility


_D_A_T_A _M_A_N_A_G_E_M_E_N_T _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E

SGC6824          Multics Forum Facility
SGD6800          MRDS (Multics Relational Data Store)
SGD6801          LINUS (Logical Inquiry and Update System)


_A_P_P_L_I_C_A_T_I_O_N_S _S_O_F_T_W_A_R_E

AGS6801          Timesharing Library (see Note 3)
AGS6802          ISTAT (Interactive Statistics) (see Note 3)
AGS6803          Graphics Facility


Notes:

     1.   Licensed  for  use  without  separate  charge  to users
          acquiring a central processor system from Honeywell.

     2.   Class II - Maintained only.



Priced Software                B-2                        SRB10.2


     3.   Class III - Unsupported.

     4.   Required  for normal  Multics operation  and to support
          any additional separately priced software products.

     5.   Sites ordering this software  should contact Charles B.
          Thompson,  Multics  Program  Office,  602-249-7050 (HVN
          341-7050).















































Priced Software                B-3                        SRB10.2








                           APPENDIX C


                      DOCUMENTATION CHANGES




_C_U_R_R_E_N_T _M_U_L_T_I_C_S _D_O_C_U_M_E_N_T_A_T_I_O_N _S_T_A_T_U_S

A  complete   list  of  all   current  manuals  is   provided  in
>doc>info>manuals.info  as  part of  MR10.2.  Subsequent  to this
release  a  SiteSA  may  obtain an  updated  list  of  manuals at
>doc>info>manuals.info on System M.


_M_R_1_0_._0 _D_o_c_u_m_e_n_t_a_t_i_o_n

    _N_o_t_e_s _D_o_c_.__N_o_.   _D_o_c_u_m_e_n_t__T_i_t_l_e

          AG91-02E    MPM - Reference Guide
          AG92-04A    MPM - Commands and Active Functions
          AG93-03A    MPM - Subroutines
          AK50-02     MAM - System
          AK51-01E    MAM - Project
          AK92-02D    MPM - Subsystem Writers' Guide
          AM81-02A    Multics Operators Handbook
          AN50-05     Guide to Multics Manuals
          AN52-01B    Multics System Metering
          AR97-02     Hardware Diagnostic Aids
          AS68-00D    MAM - Registration and Accounting
          AW17-04     Multics Commands and Active Functions
                        Pocket Guide
          AX49-01C    MPM - Peripheral Input/Output
          AZ03-02A    Multics System Programming Tools
          CC34-01D    Multics Bulk Input/Output
          CC75-01     MAM - Communications
          CC92-01A    MPM - Communications Input/Output
          CH27-00C    Emacs Text Editor Users' Guide
          CJ52-01     Multics Emacs Extension Writers' Guide
          CP51-01     Menu Creation Facilities
              -01A
          CY73-00     Inter-Multics File Transfer Facility
                        Reference Manual
          CY74-00     Multics Forum Interactive Meeting
                        System Users' Guide



Documentation Changes          C-1                        SRB10.2


_M_R_1_0_._1 _D_o_c_u_m_e_n_t_a_t_i_o_n

    _N_o_t_e_s _D_o_c_.__N_o_.   _D_o_c_u_m_e_n_t__T_i_t_l_e

          AG91-03     Multics Programmer's Reference Manual
          AG92-05     Multics Commands and Active Functions
          AG93-04     Multics Subroutines and Input/Output
                        Modules
          AK50-02A    MAM - System
          AK51-01F    MAM - Project
          AM81-02B    Multics Operators' Handbook
          AT58-03A    Multics FORTRAN Reference Manual
          AW53-04A    Multics Relational Data Store Reference
                        Manual
          AZ49-02B    Logical Inquiry and Update System
                        Reference Manual
          AZ98-02     Multics WORDPRO Reference Manual
          CC69-00A    Multics Report Program Generator Reference
                        Manual
          CC70-01B    Multics FORTRAN Users' Guide
          CC74-00C    MAM - Resource Control
          CC75-01A    MAM - Communications
          CG40-01     Qedx Text Editor Users' Guide
          CH23-01     Mail System Users' Guide
          CH27-00D    Emacs Text Editor Users' Guide
          CJ52-01A    Emacs Extension Writers' Guide
          CP31-00A    Introduction to Emacs Text Editor
          CP50-00A    Multics Text Editor (Ted) Reference Manual
          CP51-01B    Multics Menu Creation Facilities
          CX20-02     Multics Executive Mail Facility Quick
                        Reference Guide
          CY73-00A    Inter-Multics File Transfer Facility
                        Reference Manual
          CY74-00A    Multics Forum Interactive Meeting System
                        Users' Guide
          GB58-00     Multics Common Commands


Reorganized the  MPM set of  manuals for purposes  of clarity and
ease of use.   The six former MPM manuals,  Tools, and RCP Users'
Guide have been consolidated into a new set of three manuals:

     Multics  Programmer's Reference  Manual (AG91)  contains all
            the reference material from the former eight manuals.

     Multics  Commands and  Active Functions  (AG92) contains all
            the  commands  and active  functions from  the former
            eight manuals.

     Multics Subroutines and I/O  Modules (AG93) contains all the
            subroutines  and  I/O modules  from the  former eight
            manuals.



Documentation Changes          C-2                        SRB10.2


The following manuals are obsolete:

     MPM Peripheral Input/Output      AX49
     MPM Subsystem Writers' Guide     AK92
     MPM Communications I/O           CC92
     Programming Tools                AZ03
     Resource Control Users' Guide    CT38


_M_R_1_0_._2 _D_o_c_u_m_e_n_t_a_t_i_o_n

    _N_o_t_e_s _D_o_c_.__N_o_.   _D_o_c_u_m_e_n_t__T_i_t_l_e

          AG91-03A    Multics Programmer's Reference Manual
          AG92-05A    Multics Commands and Active Functions
          AG93-04A    Multics Subroutines and I/O Modules
          AK50-02B    MAM-System
          AM81-02C    Multics Operator's Handbook
          AN05-02     Multics GCOS Environment Simulator
          AN50-07     Guide to Multics Manuals
          AR97-03     Multics System Diagnostic Aids
          AT58-03B    Multics FORTRAN Reference Manual
     (1)  AU77-02C    Multics Online Test and Diagnostic
                        Reference Manual
          AW17-06     Multics Commands and Active Functions
                        Pocket Guide
     (2)  AW53-04B    Multics Relational Data Store
          AZ49-03     Multics Logical Inquiry and Update
                        System Reference Manual
          CC70-01C    Multics FORTRAN User's Guide
          CC75-01B    MAM-Communications
          CH23-01A    Extended Mail User's Guide
          CH27-00E    Emacs Text Editor User's Guide
          CP51-01C    Multics Menu Creation Facilities
          CY73-01     Inter-Multics File Transfer Facility
          CY74-01     Multics Forum Interactive Meeting System
          GB59-00     Multics Satellite 6M Reference Manual
          GB60-00     Multics HASP Service and Utility Manual
          GB61-00     Operator's Guide to Multics


_N_o_t_e_s

 (1) This manual will not be available/orderable until 03/84.
 (2) This manual will not be available/orderable until 04/84.










Documentation Changes          C-3                        SRB10.2








                           APPENDIX D


            RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY ENHANCEMENTS
                      TO THE STORAGE SYSTEM




_I_N_T_R_O_D_U_C_T_I_O_N

(10.0) This appendix describes  a significant enhancement made to
the Multics Storage System in  MR10.0.  The changes represent the
first phase of a coordinated  plan to improve the reliability and
availability  of the  Multics Storage  System.  The  goals of the
plan are to:

ox    maintain each Storage System volume in a consistent state at
     all times, so that the volume can be mounted and used by the
     Storage System without exceptional recovery action following
     any type of crash.

ox    maintain  sufficient redundancy  in all  Storage System data
     stored on disk to detect likely media failures.

ox    allow a  physical volume salvage  to occur while  the target
     volume is being used for paging.

The changes in MR10.0 achieve the first of the three goals listed
above.  Changes  in futures releases will  address the second and
third goals.


The  remainder  of this  appendix describes  the changes  made in
MR10.0.


_R_E_C_O_V_E_R_Y _A_F_T_E_R _C_R_A_S_H _W_I_T_H_O_U_T _E_S_D

An  important feature  of MR10.0 is  the ability  to bootload the
system  following  any  type  of  crash  (with  the  exception of
physical  media  damage to  volumes on  the Root  Logical Volume)
without volume salvages.






Storage System Enhancement     D-1                        SRB10.2


_C_h_a_n_g_e_s _f_r_o_m _M_R_9_._1

In MR9.1,  the recovery time  after a crash without  ESD could be
quite long, as each disk volume  mounted at the time of the crash
required a volume salvage before it could be used.  The following
are  the  characteristics of  MR10.0  recovery which  differ from
recovery in MR9.1:

ox    After a crash, without ESD,  a disk volume which was mounted
     at the time  of the crash can be  used immediately without a
     volume  salvage.    If  a  disk  volume   is  used  in  this
     circumstance, some free records on the volume may be lost to
     the system and  some free VTOCEs on the  volume may likewise
     be lost.  Any  lost records or VTOCEs remain  lost until the
     next time the volume is salvaged.

ox    A volume  which is not  a member of the  Root Logical Volume
     (RLV) are  not salvaged automatically.  It  is salvaged only
     on request.   That is, it  is salvaged only  if the operator
     uses the  salvage_vol command when  it is not in  use by the
     system.

ox    A volume which is a member  of the Root Logical Volume (RLV)
     is salvaged automatically  during system initialization only
     if  there  is  danger  that the  system  might  not complete
     initialization otherwise.   When this happens,  a message is
     displayed on the console.

The effect  of this feature  is that the system  can recover very
quickly after almost  any type of crash.  When  this is done, the
capacity  of  the  disk  volumes  affected  is  reduced  slightly
(capacity here  means number of  available records and  number of
available  VTOCEs).   The  site  can  recover  this  capacity  by
scheduling physical  volume salvages at a  convenient time.  Note
that the  only difference between  using a volume  which has been
salvaged  and  using  that  same volume  without  salvage  is the
apparent  capacity of  the volume  (in terms  of numbers  of free
records  and  numbers of  free  VTOCEs).  Files  resident  on the
volume are not affected by the  salvage, so user data is not lost
by using a volume without salvaging.


_V_o_l_u_m_e _I_n_c_o_n_s_i_s_t_e_n_c_i_e_s

In  MR9.1, a  physical volume  salvage was  scheduled whenever an
inconsistency  was  detected  in  the control  structures  of the
volume  (the  Volume  Map  or the  linked  list  of  free VTOCEs,
specifically).


In MR10.0, these control structures  are maintained in such a way
that it is  not necessary to salvage a  volume prior to attaching
it to  the system.  Inconsistencies  caused by ESD  failure leave


Storage System Enhancement     D-2                        SRB10.2


the  volume  in a  safe state,  and  result only  in the  loss of
records or VTOCEs until the next volume salvage.

Except for the  Root Logical Volume, it is  the responsibility of
the  Site Administrator  to schedule physical  volume salvages to
recover  lost  records and  VTOCEs.  A  volume salvage  should be
scheduled whenever  a particular physical volume  has few records
or VTOCEs unused, if that  volume has inconsistencies.  To assist
the Site  Administrator in determining when  this is necessary or
desirable, the system does the following:

ox    Maintains  a  count of  all  inconsistencies detected  for a
     volume  since  the  last  volume  salvage.   This  count  is
     maintained in  the Volume Label.  This  count is incremented
     by one at the following times:

     -    The volume is  mounted after it has not  been shut down
          properly (e.g., mounted after a crash without ESD, when
          the volume was mounted at the time of the crash).

     -    An inconsistency is detected in the Volume Map.

     -    An inconsistency is detected in the VTOC Map.

ox    When a volume is mounted for which inconsistencies have been
     detected, the following message  is recorded into the syserr
     log:

          init_volmap_seg:  UUUU volume inconsistencies on
          dskX_NN.  VVVV records left.  WWWW VTOCEs left.

     where:

     UUUU
          is the count of volume inconsistencies

     VVVV
          is the number of available free records on the volume

     WWWW
          is the number of available free VTOCEs on the volume

ox    When  a volume  is demounted for  which inconsistencies have
     been  detected, the  following message is  recorded into the
     syserr log:

          fsout_vol:  UUUU volume inconsistencies on dskX_NN.
          VVVV records left.  WWWW VTOCEs left.

     where the meaning of the fields printed is as above.

     In general, the Site  Administrator should schedule a volume



Storage System Enhancement     D-3                        SRB10.2


     salvage when  the count of inconsistencies  becomes high, or
     when the count of free records or VTOCEs becomes low.


_S_a_l_v_a_g_i_n_g _t_h_e _R_P_V

The Root Physical Volume (RPV) can be salvaged only during system
initialization.   To do  this, use  the following  BOS command to
boot the system:

          BOOT tape_drive RPVS


_S_a_l_v_a_g_i_n_g _t_h_e _R_L_V

A volume which  is a member of the Root  Logical Volume (RLV) can
be salvaged  only during system initialization.   To do this, use
the following BOS command to boot the system:

          BOOT tape_drive RLVS

During initialization, all volumes of the RLV are salvaged.


_S_a_l_v_a_g_i_n_g _O_t_h_e_r _V_o_l_u_m_e_s

A volume which  is not a member of the  Root Logical Volume (RLV)
can be salvaged when it is not  in use by the system.  To salvage
a volume, use the salvage_vol command described in the MOH.


_D_i_r_e_c_t_o_r_y _S_a_l_v_a_g_i_n_g _D_u_r_i_n_g _I_n_i_t_i_a_l_i_z_a_t_i_o_n

Whenever  a salvage  of the  RPV or  the RLV  is requested during
initialization,  all directories  touched in  ring-0 are salvaged
automatically.  These directories are the root (>) and >dumps.


_M_i_s_c_e_l_l_a_n_e_o_u_s _I_t_e_m_s

Changed  the  sweep_pv command  to  optimize file  placement when
vacating a physical volume.  That is, it always moves segments to
physical  volumes  with  the  most available  space.   If several
processes are being used to  vacate a physical volume, all copies
of sweep_pv optimize file placement.  Removed the -no_opt control
argument  as  it is  not  necessary to  inhibit the  volume being
vacated manually.  The sweep_pv command inhibits the volume being
vacated when  it is invoked,  and it leaves  the volume inhibited
when it terminates.

Changed the  output of the display_label  and display_pvte tools.
Refer to the Tools Manual (Order Number AZ03).



Storage System Enhancement     D-4                        SRB10.2


Changed  the output  of the  file_system_meters metering command.
Refer to the Metering Manual (Order Number AN52).


_C_H_A_N_G_E_S _T_O _T_H_E _L_A_Y_O_U_T _O_F _A _D_I_S_K _V_O_L_U_M_E

Changed  the  layout  of  a  Multics  disk  volume.   Site unique
programs which depend on the layout  of a disk volume may require
modification.   The  changes  are   described  by  the  following
paragraphs.


_L_a_b_e_l

Added new  fields in a  compatible manner, with  the exception of
the  removal of  label.time_unmounted.  Programs  which reference
this  field  continue to  work on  MR10.0 volumes  if recompiled.
Programs which need to operate  on both MR9.1 and MR10.0 volumes,
and  which  reference  this   field,  should  use  the  following
technique.  Examine the new field label.volmap_version.  If it is
1, the  volume is in  MR10.0 layout, and  label.time_unmounted is
valid.   If  it  is  any   other  value,  use  the  include  file
old_fs_vol_label.incl.pl1,    and    take     the    time    from
old_label.time_unmounted.


_D_u_m_p_e_r _B_i_t _M_a_p

This region of  the volume (records 4 and  5) was formerly called
the VTOC Header,  and it also included the  Dumper Bit Map.  With
MR10.0,  it contains  only the  Dumper Bit  Map.  The information
previously maintained in the VTOC Header is now maintained in the
VTOC Map.


_V_T_O_C _M_a_p

This region of  the volume (record 6) was  previously unused.  It
is now  a bit map  of free VTOCEs,  with a header  describing the
number of  VTOCEs on the  volume, the number of  free VTOCEs, and
the  size of  the VTOC (in  records).  Refer to  the include file
vtoc_map.incl.pl1.


_V_T_O_C_E_s

Free VTOCEs  no longer form  a linked list, but  are described by
the VTOC Map.







Storage System Enhancement     D-5                        SRB10.2


_D_I_S_K _V_O_L_U_M_E _L_A_Y_O_U_T _C_O_N_V_E_R_S_I_O_N

A  disk  volume in  MR9.1 layout  is converted  automatically the
first time the  logical volume to which it  belongs is mounted on
an  MR10.0 system  (or, for volumes  in the  Root Logical Volume,
during  the  first bootload  of MR10.0).   When this  occurs, the
following message is displayed on the console:

     VTOC Conversion of dskX_NN, volume PVNAME of logical vol
     LVNAME

The  conversion  takes approximately  30-45 seconds  per physical
volume.

If necessary, a  volume in MR10.0 layout may be  used on an MR9.1
system.   When an  MR10.0 volume is  mounted on  a system running
MR9.1,  the  volume  is  salvaged  automatically.   This  salvage
accomplishes the  conversion of the volume  from MR10.0 layout to
MR9.1  layout.  So  it is  possible to  switch between  MR9.1 and
MR10.0,  at  the cost  of a  volume salvage  of all  disk volumes
needed.


_W_I_R_E_D _M_E_M_O_R_Y _I_N_C_R_E_A_S_E

With MR10.0, Multics uses additional wired memory, as follows:

ox    For  each  disk  device  defined  in  the  configuration, an
     additional 80 words of memory (when compared with MR9.1).

ox    Each  disk volume  which is mounted  for use  by the Storage
     System consumes a 4K Active Segment Table Entry (ASTE) while
     it is mounted.






















Storage System Enhancement     D-6                        SRB10.2


_I_N_C_L_U_D_E _F_I_L_E _C_H_A_N_G_E_S

Changed the following include  files.  Site unique programs which
reference these include files may require compilation:

disk_pack.incl.pl1
     modified  to reflect  the new disk  volume layout (described
     elsewhere in this SRB).

fs_vol_label.incl.pl1,
fs_vol_label.incl.alm
     modified  to reflect  the new disk  volume layout (described
     elsewhere   in   this   SRB).    Added   fields   and  moved
     time_unmounted.

pvt.incl.pl1,
pvt.incl.alm
     split into two files:

     pvt.incl.pl1,
     pvt.incl.alm
          describes the PVT header.

     pvte.incl.pl1,
     pvte.incl.alm
          describes a PVTE.

pxss_page_stack.incl.alm
     reworked considerably.  Site extensions  to ALM page control
     or to traffic control require modification.

vtoce.incl.pl1,
vtoce.incl.alm
     removed obsolete fields.





















Storage System Enhancement     D-7                        SRB10.2








                           APPENDIX E


                 RECOVERING MASKED FNP CHANNELS




(10.1)  Sites  that  use site-supplied  multiplexers  are advised
that, as  a result of the  changes made to allow  the recovery of
masked  FNP  channels, some  of the  internal interfaces  used by
multiplexers have changed as described below.

New Calling Sequence for multiplexer_mgr_$mpx_crashed

Added  a  bit (1)  aligned  argument, "reload_sw",  to  the entry
multiplexer_mgr_$mpx_crashed,  between  the   mpx_name  and  code
arguments.    This   argument  indicates   whether  or   not  the
multiplexer is to be  automatically reloaded.  "1"b means reload,
"0"b means do not reload.  (The pre-10.1 version always reloads.)
This  entry   is  called  by  as_{NAME}_mpx_   modules  when  the
multiplexer crashes, so  all such entries MUST be  changed to use
the new calling sequence:

declare multiplexer_mgr_$mpx_crashed entry (char(*), bit(1)
   aligned, fixed bin(35));

call multiplexer_mgr_$mpx_crashed (mpx_name, reload_sw,
   code);


New Interrupt Type for Level-2 Multiplexers

A multiplexer that runs as an immediate subchannel of an FNP MUST
be prepared to  accept a new interrupt type,  named MASKED, which
indicates that the multiplexer channel has been masked by the FNP
for  excessive  interrupts.   The  interrupt type  is  defined in
mcs_interrupt_info.incl.pl1.   The  correct  way  to  handle this
interrupt is  to treat it  exactly like hangup, except  to send a
different  wakeup to  the Initializer so  that the as_{NAME}_mpx_
module knows  to prevent automatic reload  of the multiplexer (by
using  the  reload_sw  argument  to multiplexer_mgr_$mpx_crashed,
described  above).  The  multiplexer should be  reloaded later by
means of an explicit load_mpx command.





Recovering Masked FNP Channels E-1                        SRB10.2








                           APPENDIX F


                          SATELLITE 6M




Support has  been added to  Multics for the  Satellite 6M product
over an X.25 connection (Marketing ID SHC2572).  This includes an
IO module (rbf_) to allow the use of the Remote Batch Facility on
the DPS6 over an X.25 connection, in the same way it is currently
used  over a  G115 connection.   Also included  is a  command (nr
l6_ftf)  to initiate  file transfers to  or from the  DPS6, and a
special process overseer (l6_tran_overseer_) to allow the DPS6 to
initiate  file  transfers  to  or  from  Multics.   Satellite  6M
includes a  PAD function which allows  terminals connected to the
DPS6 to  log through to  Multics using the  Multics X.25 Protocol
Interface Facility,  a Remote Batch Facility  (RBTX) which allows
remote batch operations such as  printing, card input etc., and a
File Transfer Facility (TRANX) which  allows the DPS6 to initiate
file transfers to or from Multics.

The   following   notes  describe   various   considerations  and
limitations which  need to be  taken into account  when using the
Satellite 6M product.


_M_U_L_T_I_C_S _N_O_T_E_S

1)   The  "nr l6_ftf"  command for  initiating file  transfers on
     Multics  uses an  X.25 dial-out channel  to communicate with
     the  DPS6.   Thus,  the  user   needs  "rw"  access  to  the
     particular  channel  to  be  used,  and  he  also  needs the
     "dialok" attribute as one of his user attributes.

2)   The  process overseer  (l6_tran_overseer_) which  allows the
     DPS6 to  initate file transfers operates  over a normal X.25
     login channel.  In order to  use a special process overseer,
     the user must have the  "vinitproc" attribute.  Also, if the
     user  expects to  be logged in  to Multics at  the same time
     that the  DPS6 initiates a  file transfer on  his behalf, he
     must have  the "multip" attribute.   (This is because  a new
     instance of the user is logged in to do the file transfer).

3)   The Satellite  6M Remote Batch Facility  (RBTX) initiates an
     X.25  connection  to Multics  with  the Call  Request packet


Satellite 6M                   F-1                        SRB10.2


     containing user data  of "rbtx".  In order for  this call to
     connect to the proper IO Daemon process on Multics, a driver
     process should  already have attached an  X.25 slave channel
     which contains "rbtx"  in its user data field.   A sample IO
     Daemon Table definition follows:

     Device:             l6_x25;
       driver_module:    remote_driver_;
       args:             "station=l6_x25,slave=yes,desc=-terminal
                            -comm tty_ -no_hangup_on_detach";
       line:             g.h102.rbtx01;

       minor_device:     printer;
       minor_args:       "dev=printer";
       default_type:     l6;

       minor_device:     punch;
       minor_args:       "dev=punch";
       default_type:     rem_pun;

       minor_device:     reader;
       minor_args:       "dev=reader";
       default_type:     rem_pun;

4)   The  X.25  channel  definition   for  the  connection  to  a
     Satellite  6M should  have the  same packet  size and window
     size  as those  defined in  the Satellite  6M configuration.
     The  defaults  for both  sides are  128 and  2 respectively.
     Notice that  the user of  the "nr l6_ftf"  command must know
     both  the  channel  name  (for the  -net  argument)  and the
     network  address of  the DPS6  (for the  -at argument).  The
     channel name may be a star name, e.g.  g.h102.*.  For direct
     connect X.25 networks, the network address is not important,
     but  must   be  specified  (as  anything),   while  for  VAN
     connections, the network address must be as defined for that
     VAN.  A sample CMF and TTF for a direct connect X.25 channel
     that  supports  remote  batch,  file  transfer,  login,  and
     dial-out is given below.

5)   Some sample  user command lines based  on the definitions in
     the sample CMF, TTF, and DPS6 configuration follow:

     To send a file to the DPS6:

       nr l6_ftf clm >SID>CLM_USER -at 3411 -net g.h102.*

     To receive a file from the DPS6:

       nr l6_ftf >SID>CLM_USER -at 3411 clm -net g.h102.*

     To dial-out to the DPS6 to login:

       dial_out g.h102.* *3411


Satellite 6M                   F-2                        SRB10.2



     In the examples above, the "11" on the network address sets
     the user call data in the X.25 connection request so that the
     DPS6 Listener will answer and do the appropriate thing.  In the
     dial_out example, the "*" in front of the network address
     tells Multics to act like a PAD.


     Sample CMF entry:

       name: g.h102;
       service: multiplexer;
       line_type: X25LAP;
       multiplexer_type: x25;
       baud: 9600;
       dataset: 208A;
       terminal_type: X25_L6_DCE;
       comment: "voice-grade HDLC, L6, port D03";

       name: g.h102.001-g.h102.002;
       service: login;
       comment: "X.25 subchannel";

       name: g.h102.003-g.h102.004;
       service: autocall;
       comment: "X.25 subchannel";

       name: g.h102.005-g.h102.006;
       service: login;
       comment: "X.25 subchannel";

       name: g.h102.rbtx01-g.h102.rbtx02;
       service: slave;
       comment: "X.25 subchannel";

     Sample TTF entry:

       terminal_type: X25_L6_DCE;
       additional_info: "n_lc=8 type=DCE address=56
                          link_protocol=LAPB";


_L_E_V_E_L _6 _N_O_T_E_S

1)  PAD limitations:  If, during  input, the terminal beeps, some
     amount of  input (usually one character)  has been lost, and
     must be retyped.

2)  TRANX  limitations  and additions:   TRANX supports  the "**"
     convention for transferring all of the files in a directory.
     It  does  not  support  multiple file  name  transfers, file
     concatenation, or directory level transfers.



Satellite 6M                   F-3                        SRB10.2


     Blank lines  in Multics ASCII  text files are  stored on the
     DPS6 as records containing a single SPACE (X'20') character.
     When  Multics receives  a record  containing a  single SPACE
     character, it stores this as  a blank line.  Thus, a Multics
     file  which  contains  lines  consisting of  a  single SPACE
     character cannot  be sent to  the DPS6 and  then returned to
     Multics intact.  (The line with  the SPACE character will be
     turned into a blank line.)

     For  transfers  to  Multics, TRANX  requires  the "-MULTICS"
     argument,  the "-ID  user" argument, and  the "-PW password"
     argument.  Where  "user" is the user_id  of the process that
     will  be logged  into Multics to  do the  file transfer, and
     "password" is the password for that user_id.

3)   The  Satellite  6M software  will come  on a  diskette which
     contains an  EC file, INSTALL.EC, which  will install all of
     the  necessary  software on  a  GCOS 6  MOD 400  Release 3.0
     system.

4)   The  following skeleton  files will  configure the  DPS6 for
     RBTX, TRANX, and PAD use:

     Skeleton CLM_USER file:

     *   Sample CLM_USER file for X.25.  This is only a skeleton
     *   of the CLM_USER file needed for X.25.  The other
     *   directive that are needed for normal system operation
     *   can be found in the "GCOS 6 MOD 400 System Building"
     *   manual.  The order of the X.25 directives in this
     *   CLM_USER skeleton is important, but the other directives
     *   needed can be interspersed wherever appropriate.
     *
     * SIMULATE CIP FOR X.25 AND LANGUAGES
     *
     LDBU CIPSI
     LDBU SIPSI
     *
     *************************************************************
     ********************* THE X.25 LINK *************************
     *************************************************************
     *
     LACT >SID>Z_C253
     LPHDEF 3,80,123
     LPH3 40,41,X'2F00',2,,FDX,X'0303'
     L2MON 41,42,0,40,1,8,40,TY,'999999999999',B
     PAD 4,X'02',X'0101',X'0302',X'0701'
     DEVICE TTYX0,45,43,X'8000',X25PAD,133
     DEVICE TTYX1,44,43,X'8000',,133
     DEVICE TTYX2,43,43,X'8000',,133
     *
     STTY X25PAD,80,D'00030010'
     STTY TTYX1,80,D'00030010'


Satellite 6M                   F-4                        SRB10.2


     STTY TTYX2,80,D'00030010'
     *
     X.25 42,43,X'8000',41,40,,,,,'888888888888','11'
     X.25 43,43,X'8000',41,40,,4,44,,'888888888888','11'
     X.25 45,43,X'8000',41,40,,,49,,'888888888888','11'
     *
     *************************************************************
     ******************END OF X.25 DIRECTIVES*********************
     *************************************************************
     *
     QUIT


     Skeleton System START_UP.ec:

     & Skeleton System START_UP.EC
     &
     BOOT_TIME
     &
     & Start X.25 before the Listener.
     &
     XBUFI -ARG 128
     &
     EC GROUP$L
     &
     & Spawn a task to run the Remote Batch facility.
     &
     SG R3 RJE.M 3 >SPD>CONSOLE -OUT >SPD>CONSOLE -POOL AB -WD >RBF>RBTX
     &Q


        Skeleton RBTX task START_UP.EC

     &N
     & Skeleton RBTX task START_UP.EC
     &
     & First get the devices it will use.
     &
     ASSOC 1 >SPD>CDR00
     ASSOC 2 >SPD>LPT01
     ASSOC 3 >RBF>RBTX>PUNCH
     MSW -ALL OFF -ON 01589
     RBTX 42 -UD rbtx
     &
     & Disconnect from all the resources when we are done.
     &
     DISSOC 1
     DISSOC 2
     DISSOC 3
     DISC 42
     RDN
     &Q



Satellite 6M                   F-5                        SRB10.2




        Sample PRTINIT file for Multics IO Daemon startup:

     READY -ALL
     SLAVETERM LOG
     SLAVETERM MODES LL48
     AUTO_START_DELAY 120
     GO


5)   The  following sample  command lines work  with the previous
     configurations for the DPS6 and Multics:

     To send a file from DPS6:

        TRANX ISD -MULTICS -N 45 -I START_UP.EC -A l6_start_up
               -ID Fred -PW foobar

     To send all the files in an DPS6 directory:

        TRANX ISD -MULTICS -N 45 -I >SID>** -A ** -ID Fred
           -PW foobar

     To receive multiple files from Multics:

        TRANX ISD -MULTICS -N 45 -I ** -A *.*.ec -ID Fred
           -PW foobar

6)   DPS6 Memory and Hardware Requirements for Satellite 6M
                           (MOD400 Release 3.0)

I.  Bound Unit Memory Requirements

     Z_X253 (X.25 Level 3) --  8051 words
     ZNLHPL (X.25 Level 2) --  6296 words
     PAD                   --  4867 words
     RBTX                  --  9357 words
     TRANX                 -- 10493 words
                         -----------------
               total       -- 39064 words


II.  Dynamic Memory Requirements (see Notes below)

     X.25        --  7808 words (default)
     PAD         --  1307 words + 64 words per buffer
     RBTX        --   966 words
     TRANX       --  3268 words
               -----------------
         total   -- 13347+ words




Satellite 6M                   F-6                        SRB10.2


_N_o_t_e_s

      The  X.25 memory  requirements are  tailored to  the packet
      sizes  in  use.  Up  to  six buffer  sizes may  be defined.
      These  are 64,  128, 256, 512,  1024, and  2048 bytes.  The
      default  is  64, 128,  and 256  bytes.  The  initial buffer
      allocation makes 32 buffers of each size, plus 16 extra for
      the largest buffer size specified.  The largest buffer size
      specifies the  largest Level 3  packet that may  be sent or
      received on any link.  During execution the smallest buffer
      which  will  hold the  user's data  is used.   If necessary
      during execution,  the buffer manager  attempts to allocate
      more memory for an exhausted  buffer size.  If more buffers
      cannot  be  allocated,  X.25  continues  to  function  with
      reduced   efficiency.   Periodically   the  buffer  manager
      attempts  to  release  any  additional  allocations  and to
      consolidate the buffers to the initial allocation.  The set
      of  buffers  defined applies  to all  of the  HDLC physical
      links  on  the system  (all physical  links share  the same
      buffer manager).

      The  PAD  dynamically allocates  buffers  of 64  words each
      during execution.  For normal  loads, the PAD generally has
      5  or  6 buffers  allocated.  This  makes the  total memory
      requirements be about 1700+ words (1307 + 5 * 64).

      The RBTX memory requirements  are configurable at link edit
      time, the given values are the defaults.

III. Hardware Requirements

     Requires  a  Voice-Grade  HDLC (DCF6620)  or  Wide-Band HDLC
     (DCF6622/6623)  daughter   board  for  each   physical  X.25
     connection, which will support up to 32 logical connections.

IV. Notes

     The  6M  product  is  NOT qualified  on  the  following DPS6
     models:   6/10, 6/20,  6/40, 6/45, 6/75,  and 6/95.  Product
     qualification  is planned  for the  near future  and will be
     anounced when complete.














Satellite 6M                   F-7                        SRB10.2








                           APPENDIX G


                      LIST OF FIXED ERRORS




This  appendix  provides a  complete  listing of  reported errors
fixed  in  Multics Release  10.2.   The first  section  lists, in
numerical order, problems reported by customer sites.  The second
section  lists,  in  numerical  order,  problems  reported during
Exposure and Testing by System_M users.


_F_I_E_L_D _R_E_P_O_R_T_E_D _E_R_R_O_R_S

phx02694 (FAST)
     'resequence' command fails for large program segments.
phx02980 (date_compiled)
     doesn't  report  error  when bound  segment  component isn't
     found.
phx03107 (display_audit_file)
     using  -fm  or -to  control_args and  no operands  should be
     invalid.
phx03125 (display_audit_file)
     seems to use class identifier as a match string.
phx03824 (send_mail)
     ignores saveboxes added while in qx -header
phx03879 (send_mail)
     should allow people to use reply.
phx04679 (emacs)
     emacs  sometimes  makes  two  windows with  the  same buffer
     display  the  same instead  of  dirrerent locations  with >3
     windows
phx06719 (documentation)
     Example  in Peripheral  IO Manual incorrect  and the default
     for get_line with -segment not clearly stated.
phx08391 (fortran descriptors)
     Is  it possible  to get  argument descriptors  for a Fortran
     subroutine?
phx08696 (send_mail)
     The message:  "Message has not been sent, save, or written."
     continues  to  cause minor  difficulty since  it is  not, in
     fact, accurate in some cases.




List of Fixed Errors           G-1                        SRB10.2


phx08855 (vfile_status_)
     Does not destroy shriek name iocb's.
phx08888 (send_mail)
     send_mail returns a slightly incorrect error message (tr9.d)
phx08936 (read_mail)
     Should accept the Person_ID convention that send_mail uses.
phx09088 (bound_iom_active)
     Initializer  can  hang  forever  when trying  to  unassign a
     device on a malfunctioning IOM channel.
phx09679 (dte.active)
     System  hung  trying  to   unassign  printer  during  logout
     process.
phx10131 (bound_sss_wired_ (pl1 operator round_fx1))
     Does  not  set  the  indicators properly,  unlike  the other
     similar operators (and contrary to PL/1's expectations).
phx11636 (RCPRM)
     ref_count on  free key not decremented for deregister
phx11638 (RCPRM)
     error during aqr can damage registry
phx11736 (RCPRM)
     progressive degradation of Initializer response
phx11738 (Fortran I/O)
     Fortran I/O fails to determine  the correct mode for opening
     a  file for  direct i/o when  the file  already exists.  (It
     works correctly for new files.)
phx12245 (enter_abs_request)
     The -limit control arg does not work properly.
phx12278 (linus - store)
     Quotes are processed even if a delimiter is specified.
phx12279 (LINUS - store)
     If  the last  record of  a file  store does  not end  with a
     new_line and the last field is  null, the record will not be
     stored.
phx12280 (LINUS - scalar functions)
     Scalar functions do not work on temp_table attributes.
phx12314 (fortran optimizer)
     The  fortran  optimizer  can  on  occasion  reuse  a pointer
     register while constructing an  argument list when the stack
     frame exceeds 16k words.
phx12375 (Fast command aln)
     Add_line_numbers  command overwrites  portion of  very large
     segs with \ooo's.
phx12436 (GCOS simulator)
     problems using gcos_pull_tapefile
phx12447 (Linus - Store)
     Does  not  always  properly  diagnose  extra  arguments when
     storing from a file.








List of Fixed Errors           G-2                        SRB10.2


phx12465 (LINUS)
     The last argument in a function cannot be a expression.
phx12673 (MRDS)
     retrieve sometimes overflow the stack.
phx12793 (lister)
     lister_compile_listin_  loops  endlessly  whenever  the last
     line  in  *.listin  is <field_delimiter>  with  no following
     whitespace break characters or fieldname.
phx12805 (fnp)
     fnp  crashes which  appear to  be caused  by running  out of
     buffer space.
phx12946 (RCPRM)
     list_resources  no longer  accepts "free"  and "system" with
     the -user argument.
phx12984 (AIM)
     An unclassified  line can dial  out to a  sty (software tty)
     that  is  at  a  higher  classification  (system_high)  than
     itself.
phx13076 (mcs)
     eats tty_buf.  (or, how to crash the system in 3 easy lines,
     + dcls)
phx13296 (Tolts)
     If rcprm is enabled, polts cannot get to a disk drive.
phx13300 (RCPRM)
     The command list_resources does not work with free tapes.
phx13362 (Fortran I/O)
     Problems with non-vfile_ opening for output.
phx13397 (xmail)
     xmail 1.5 does not properly handle links to mailing lists
phx13398 (hardcore)
     ioi_log_status message counting broken
phx13416 (emacs execution)
     Execution of emacs in ring 1 produces an error.
phx13458 (bound_fort_ (in mr9.1))
     Fortran won't compile, with shipped (9.1) include files.
phx13499 (Fortran tape i/o)
     fortran_io_  on  tape  using  ntape_  will  not  do  fortran
     backspace.
phx13502 (RCPRM)
     Registry seems  to get confused if  user attempts to acquire
     more resources than currently free.
phx13533 (cobol code generation)
     Under some conditions, cobol  code generated for a statement
     of  the form  'move variable  to variable(subscripted)' does
     not execute correctly.
phx13560 (fortran compiler)
     problem in ansii66 comparing holerith to integer data
phx13591 (EMACS & video_)
     The video_system.ctl does not work well with oflow.
phx13608 (Fortran 10 or fortran_io_ 10)
     error on unformatted sequential write that used to work
phx13692 (bound_fort_)
     Doesn't accept 'INQUIRE (5, ...)'.


List of Fixed Errors           G-3                        SRB10.2


phx13696 (fortran)
     Is there some sort of a bypass for fortran error 418?
phx13734 (traffic_control_queue)
     Does not work if your SST is greater than 240 pages.
phx13766 (fortran_io_ and tapes)
     fortran_io_ will not  write out a tape file  unless the file
     already exists.
phx13767 (fortran_io_ and tapes)
     fortran_io_ cannot read in a tape file that it wrote out
phx13802 (fortran)
     In  a block  data subroutine, a  link is not  created when a
     data statement initializes a common to zero.
phx13834 (firmware loading)
     Loading  T500  firmware  into   a  T610  controller  is  not
     recommended.
phx13840 (fortran compiler with -ot option)
     Fortran program compiles without  error with and without -ot
     option but fails to run in optimized version.
phx13847 (priv_delete_vtoce)
     Deletion  of a  vtoce with  UID=777777777777 by  sweep_pv or
     hp_delete_vtoce destroyed the root.
phx13882 (lister)
     faults on quoted string processing
phx13941 (enter_retrieval_request  command processing of  -fm and
     -to args.)
     The defaults for these args are set in an ambiguous fashion.
phx13949 (cobol compiler)
     illegal_procedure_condition when referencing large arrays.
phx13954 (cobol and large subscripted arrays)
     Using move and add on  consecutive subscripted elements of a
     large array sometimes stores  erroneous results or aborts on
     compilation.
phx13961 (fortran_io_)
     Bell_Canada   formally   requests  a   fix  to   Fortran  8a
     (fortran_io_)
phx14018 (fortran (rounding under fw.d))
     Fortran manual  states that a  real number output  under the
     fw.d format specification will be  rounded.  This is not the
     case when using fnnn.1 .
phx14039 (tape_archive version 3)
     "load_table" lost track of a mounted tape
phx14040 (tape_archive version 3)
     tape_archive schedules an auto  compaction for an empty tape
     archive
phx14050 (hc_ipc)
     An innocent  process can be  destroyed if its  process_id is
     known.
phx14054 (LINUS (create_list))
     create_list does  not validation on the  number of arguments
     following -field_names and does  not allocate a large enough
     structure to hold the maximum possible.
phx14080 (video)
     I'm getting a video_et_$wstatus error and don't know why?


List of Fixed Errors           G-4                        SRB10.2


phx14159 (tty_read)
     if  statement depends  on the  order that  the PL/1 compiler
     generates code in the OR'ed statement.
phx14160 (registers and addressing)
     When eaxn  instruction is greater than  2**18-1, the address
     stored  in  the  register  is  truncated  without  a warning
     message.
phx14205 (send_mail -ack for anonymous users)
     The "Acknowledge-To:" portion of the mail header infers that
     the ack will go to "anonymous_user.Project_id" when in fact,
     it will only ack to "anonymous.Project_id.
phx14235 (ibm3270_mpx)
     The limit for number of characters output in raw3270 mode is
     too low.
phx14237 (ibm3270_mpx)
     Cannot send three outputs in a row when in raw3270 mode.
phx14244 (lister_)
     The  subroutine  interface  to  lister  (lister_)  should be
     documented.
phx14245 (lister_$get_fieldnames)
     This subroutine should not free  things in the user supplied
     area.
phx14246 (linus (create_list))
     In linus, the create_list request sometimes fails.
phx14260 (gfms)
     Will not restre the gcos tss library.
phx14263 (gfms)
     When trying to restore a large  GCOS file using gfms I get a
     out_of_bounds error condition.
phx14306 (fortran_io_)
     Incorrect pathname returned by inquire statement
phx14307 (fortran_io_)
     Unexpected  error  with  close_file  when  called  within  a
     program.
phx14353 (gcos_card_utility)
     Certain control  arguments are not  recognized, for example,
     -tc.
phx14361 (io_daemon)
     Eventually fills KST.
phx14367 (fortran)
     Unexpected    error    condition    using    the   statement
     "string(exp1:)" in fortran
phx14418 (gtss)
     Programs witten in "B" will not run on Multics under gtss.
phx14421 (run units (fortran))
     run_  does  not  allow  recursion.   This  is  limiting  the
     transport of third party software to multics.
phx14445 (hardcore fnp)
     This  problem  related  to TR13366  but  slightly different.
     Problem in fnp_multiplexer has caused  at least 3 crashes at
     INRIA.




List of Fixed Errors           G-5                        SRB10.2


phx14452 (RCPRM)
     system crash because of Initializer pdir RQO
phx14484 (MRDS)
     A selection  expression which uses  the first (3)  fields of
     the keyhead  and a secondary  key is successful  if the data
     exists in the  database; if the data does  not exist a "null
     pointer" error condition persists.
phx14485 (ALM documentation/ info file)
     ALM documentation does not define the "A" error flag.
phx14514 (Tape Controller hardware/firmware)
     We have a 610 tape  controller connected to 500 tape drives.
     The controller  has two Link Adapters  connected to the same
     IOM, channels 16.  and 18.  Tapes sometimes hang on mounts.
phx14580 (probe)
     Probe can in some circumstances take a fault trying to use a
     null pointer.
phx14594 (Linus and word_processing)
     LINUS  create_lister request  outputs floating  point number
     that is  not usable within  word_pro when an  expression has
     been selected.
phx14612 (display_audit_file command)
     appears to loop on an MSF audit file
phx14642 (FORTRAN (fortran_io_?))
     Fortran right  justifies character strings  when initialized
     in a data statement.
phx14644 (FORTRAN (fortran_io_ ?))
     Fortran programs  compiled with the ansi66  option on MR10.0
     do not produce the same output as the same programs compiled
     with the MR8.2 fortran compiler, which conforms to the ansii
     66 standard.
phx14649 (forum)
     several nits.
phx14670 (bound_gcos_ (gcos_gein_))
     Will not read in any object decks.
phx14673 (Fortran IO)
     If unit 6  is opened explicitly, then output  does not go to
     terminal but to file06.
phx14674 (forum documentation)
     critical information missing for installation
phx14704 (documentation AM81)
     MOH's  description of  the BOOT  RLVS option  should be more
     precise.













List of Fixed Errors           G-6                        SRB10.2


phx14739 (x25_mpx)
     x25_mpx  crashes the  system with  a ACV{oosb}  while on the
     prds/ in idle process.
phx14742 (polts, molts, RCPRM, tapes.)
     If RCPRM is enabled, tolts won't work on tape_drives (either
     for polts or molts).
phx14743 (window_, video system)
     Does not perform as documented.
phx14746 (cobol arrays)
     The addressing  for arrays seems to  be overlaping every 64K
     characters.
phx14748 (fortran_io_)
     fortran_io_will  not allow  formatted write  to a structured
     file if the record length has changed.
phx14755 (help files)
     several nits.
phx14772 (mtr's under tolts)
     mtr to format a 451 pack fails
phx14773 (cobol)
     Under certain  conditions, a program can  be interrupted via
     QUIT, but not restarted via "start".
phx14775 (exl read_mail)
     read_mail  takes a  null pointer  fault when  the header has
     been mangled.
phx14777 (exec_com vs 2)
     strips blanks from the end of variable values
phx14782 (SCU EDAC reporting)
     unknown memory type for low profile SCU
phx14804 (xmail)
     New messages filed  in mail file, when mail  file is current
     mailbox, are not found.
phx14807 (Fortran)
     Use of a variable in main  program passed to a subroutine as
     an arg where it is dimensioned  is not detected as an error,
     and fails to execute correctly.




















List of Fixed Errors           G-7                        SRB10.2


phx14808 (Fortran)
     Incompatibility  between  documentation   and  compiler  for
     INQUIRE statement.
phx14809 (Cobol)
     cobol_expand_source_.pl1  has  a bug  when  processing large
     source progs.
phx14811 (cobol)
     record key statement required twice in file-control section.
phx14812 (fortran character "star extents")
     problem with character definition var(-n:m)*(*).
phx14817 (MCS documentation (CC75-01))
     Apx B (MCS configuration)  references LSLA channels in table
     8 but not in 7 or 6.










































List of Fixed Errors           G-8                        SRB10.2


phx14818 (gtss_drl_addmem_)
     gtss_drl_addmem_  erroneously updates  the core  "hole" when
     adding memory
phx14819 (Hardcore acl setting)
     The right sequence of hcs_ calls  will result in the sdw for
     a  segment not  having the  same permissions  as the current
     acl.
phx14840 (dprint/enter_output_request)
     dprint fails with bad error message if initiated from lowere
     ring process
phx14841 (storage system)
     problems deletiing level 1 directories
phx14866 (x25_mpx)
     x25_mpx will crash the system with a null pointer fault when
     handling  interrupts  and  it  requests  buffer  space  from
     tty_space_man$get_buffer that cant be allocated.
phx14869 (MTR's under TOLTS)
     test 6 does not catch all the bad spots on a (451) pack.
phx14874 (FORTRAN 10.1)
     program compiled with -card and -ot gets compiler error 418
phx14886 (dump_vtoce)
     dump_vtoce displays  octal garbage for the  PV name, given a
     PVT index.
phx14902 (documentation)
     Metering manual does not agree with tune_work_class command.
phx14905 (gcos simulator, $TAPE)
     It is not possible to specify  the 6250 density in the $TAPE
     card.
phx14907 (ed_installation_parms)
     ed_installation_parms    fails    to    set    changes    to
     authentication_level correctly.
phx14908 (iobm_meters)
     The metering command "iobm_meters" blows up in ring-0.
phx14927 (exl mail_system)
     If  the destination  is not  specified in  the command line,
     then the host_id is not included  in the From field when the
     mail is sent offsite.
phx14931 (time zone conversion)
     there  seems  to  be  an  inconsistency  in  the  time  zone
     conversion algorithms used by encode_ & decode_clock_value_
phx14932 (installed version of ted)
     buffer sometimes lost
phx14941 (perm_syserr_log)
     I am unable to read the syserr_log
phx14978 (documentation)
     allocation_storage help file needs updating.
phx14987 (X.25)
     Dialing  out to  the dialing  DTE (ie.   loopback) in MR10.0
     with Datapac does not consistently work.






List of Fixed Errors           G-9                        SRB10.2


phx14996 (Volume Backup tools)
     volume_cross_check does not know about preattached volumes
phx15005 (enter_imft_request)
     Control argument -absolute_pathname is misspelled in source.
phx15012 (get_quota active function)
     The  get_quota  command  does  not function  properly  as an
     active function.
phx15017 (forum)
     "<More>"  is put  over the end  of a subject  field when the
     entire  field will  fit in the  defined line  length for the
     current terminal.
phx15019 (probe)
     is ungraceful for second user without .probe segment.
phx15049 (pr54 printers, EURC and forms alignment)
     There  is  a  problem   with  forms  alignment  using  PR54s
     configured  as  model 1201  driven  from an  EURC.   After a
     'sample_hs' driver request, the forms are misaligned.
phx15056 (PR54 EURC)
     Our PR54 printers, driven from an EURC, frequently hang with
     connect while busy IOM status.
phx15064  (Unexpected  difference  between  ANSI 66  and  ANSI 77
     Fortran)
     A  program acts  differently when compiled  with -ansi66 and
     -ansi77, yet  the documentation leads us  to believe that it
     should act the same.
phx15070 (ibm3270_mpx)
     Hitting break on a 3270 device can crash the system.
phx15090 (FNP)
     After  installing  MR10.1,  we  have one  FNP  which crashes
     frequently.  Cause unknown, as of  yet unable to place blame
     on hard/software.
phx15093 (AIM)
     Potential security problem if the entry "Attributes:  none;"
     exists in the CMF.
phx15101 (forum)
     Illegal(?)  trans specifier appear to cause loop.
phx15126 (Fortran)
     Fortran does not support the inquire by file statement.
phx15131 (tty_ special character tables)
     Through  a call  to iox_$control  to a  switch connected via
     tty_,  the "set_special"  operation will  allow the  user to
     exceed the three character area limitation.
phx15139 (LINUS)
     Command line argument passing fails.
phx15140 (Documentation)
     Inaccuracy  in the  documentation of  the -debug  arg to the
     backup_dump command in the MOH.
phx15143 (tape_mult_)
     can lose files at end of tape reel.






List of Fixed Errors          G-10                        SRB10.2


phx15144 (pl1_operators)
     pl1 allocate  will create a  new unique.area.linker segment,
     but in the current ring of execution rather than the ring of
     the area being extended
phx15157 (sty multiplexer)
     When  using  STY  multiplexer  channels, if  a  user process
     issues a reset_read control operation, the connection ceases
     to function.
phx15183 (vfile_)
     Receieved   the  Error:    Attempt  by  open_indx_file|16367
     >sl1>....  to refernce thru  null pointer.  while performing
     a read record  operation.  Need to know whether  cpf to copy
     will produce a consistent file.
phx15188 (send_mail)
     Mail sent by anonymous users  is not identified well enough.
     It  can  be made  to look  like anybody  else sent  the mail
     message.
phx15207 (fortran (ansi77))
     no   error   message   is   printed   for   the  declaration
     character*3l.   Fortran (-ansi77  -card) just  defaults this
     whatever the current default is for the data types.
phx15216 (Scavenger)
     The  Scavenger  does not  check for  pages of  segments also
     appearing  in the  free page  map.  This  can cause  a large
     amount of file system damage.
phx15238 (TTT)
     the  definition  of clear_screen  in the  ttt entry  for the
     VT100 does not function properly
phx15240 (executive_mail mailing lists)
     xmail mailing lists will not  display if there are more than
     two components in the name.
phx15247 (linus)
     linus  fails  to eliminate  duplicate values  when selecting
     from a submodel
phx15259 (hardcore)
     sys_info.system_control_dir initialization missing
phx15262 (RCPRM documentation - manual ct38)
     The description of the subroutine resource_info_$defaults is
     incorrect
phx15267 (Volume Retriever)
     explicit -to time lost
phx15343 (Tolts, tolts_device_info_.pl1)
     Polts on  tape drives does  not work when  RCPRM is switched
     on.
phx15360 (mcs flow control)
     Printers using flow control fail regularly printing rubbish









List of Fixed Errors          G-11                        SRB10.2


phx15366 (MCS)
     Output flow control has problem in MR10.1.  This occurs when
     line  speed is  much faster  than the  display speed  of the
     terminal.
phx15370 (nd_handler_)
     nd_handler_ handles VTOC connection failures poorly.
phx15405 (gcos environment simulator)
     Invalid M2/N3 gecall errors from  the simulator caused by an
     error in gcos_mme_save_.
phx15407 (gcos environment simulator)
     Bad code in courtesy call processing causes wild transfers.
phx15411 (linus)
     Selects  of  functions with  only  one constant  argument no
     longer work.
phx15426 (linus)
     if  a linus  macro invokes a  command that  takes input from
     user_input,  that command  reads lines from  the linus macro
     segment.
phx15427 (version 2 exec_com)
     &LF not recognized
phx15447 (delete_acl)
     delete_acl command performs an undocumented operation.
phx15450 (Linus)
     Linus store request does not detect non-existant input file.
phx15455 (linus)
     The linus store request does  not properly handle input file
     data containing quotes.
phx15473 (exec_com / harcore ??)
     User  had  one  of  his   ec's  destroyed  when  he  took  a
     Segment-fault.   The "problem  portion" of  this TR explains
     the sequence of what happened.
phx15476 (online info)
     typo in vfile_adjust.info
phx15481 (cobol, version 5.2, report writer)
     The  "supress"  verb  does  not  work.   When  used  in  the
     DECLARITIVES   section   was    partially   ignored   during
     compilation  and  does not  generate  the necessary  code to
     cause the supression to take place,.
phx15483 (MPS under gcos emulator)
     Some models require several time the expected cpu time.















List of Fixed Errors          G-12                        SRB10.2


phx15491 (cobol 5.2, report writer)
     When  a level  88 condition-name  entry appears  in the Data
     Division with more than four  VALUE literals and is combined
     with Report Writer the compiler aborts.
phx15495 (MCS)
     FNP crashes with illegal opcode fault.
phx15500 (EURC)
     Card reader time out using EURC
phx15503 (online info)
     obsolete infos in >doc>info
phx15512 (GCOS environment simulator)
     Multi-record simulation does not work correctly due to a bug
     in gcos_mme_inos_.
phx15551 (message segments)
     ms_create  command  doesnt  supply  the  default  access  as
     documented.
phx15573 (metering tools)
     SCSI seems to be getting 'bad sample' from tcq always.
phx15577 (monitor_log)
     If  running monitor_log  on >sc1>log,  the log  fills up and
     thus  creates  a new  one between  updates, when  the update
     occurs the entire old log is printed.
phx15584 (imft_cir_mir_commands_)
     In  imft_cir_mir_commands_,  the  "retry_operation"  flag is
     turned on before the first read is attempted.  Therefore, if
     the read fails, the retry will not be attempted.
phx15612 (System Administration)
     "salvage_mstb" does not copy acl.
phx15619 (io_call)
     put_chars needs argument to allow text beginning with hyphen
phx15628 (imft_driver_)
     IMFT does not work with device classes.
phx15633 (MRDS)
     Tuple  that  was just  stored  cannot be  retrieved  with an
     unrestricted    select    on   the    database    open   for
     retrieve/exclusive retrieve.
phx15642 (documentation)
     dprint's and eor's description of -page_length is ambiguous.
phx15668 (documentation)
     all   of   the   infos   which    used   to   be   part   of
     special_active_functions.info     are     missing     except
     exists.info.













List of Fixed Errors          G-13                        SRB10.2


phx15669 (linus)
     Invalid  items  in  a  file   input  to  linus  store  cause
     subsequent, valid, items not to be stored.
phx15682 (new_user and pnt_manager_)
     new_user and pnt_manager_ won't delete aliases
phx15683 (Processor manual (AL39) error)
     Multics  Processor  Manual (AL39-01B)  incorrectly describes
     "itp" and "its" address modification.
phx15694 (Volume Dumper)
     Disk errors during Volume dump can crash system.
phx15720 (Multics processor manual)
     Apparent  error  in   AL39-01B  concerning  decimal  numeric
     floating point operands.
phx15724 (new_user$cga)
     Setting audit flags with new_user$cga can cause an "line too
     long" error message if all the flags are used.
phx15725 (set_max_length)
     Incorrect online documentation for set_max_length.
phx15726 (audit, pnt, sat)
     The documentaton in the MAM System Administrator's Manual is
     unclear with regards to setting audit flags for a process.
phx15728 (online documentation, generate_mst)
     Documentation of  the "acl" keyword in  the info segment for
     generate_mst is incorrect
phx15736 (cv_ttf)
     cv_ttf  requires  "like"  terminal  types  to  be  after the
     terminal they are "like"
phx15737 (probe)
     Nasty message from probe about debug breaks.
phx15738 (Documentation)
     The MAM  System Administrator's Manual is  missing some lines
     of documentation.
phx15750 (System crash with "tty_space_man:  Adress not in buffer
     pool")
     If FNP times out on "get meters" system can crash with above
     message.
phx15758 (Satellite 6M)
     DPS6  logins and  file transfers initiated  from Multics are
     refused.  Using rel 2.0 of  Satellite 6M software on rel 2.1
     Mod 400 operation system.
phx15769 (cobol-74 compiler)
     The packed  bit is not  being set correctly  for comp-8 sync
     type data.












List of Fixed Errors          G-14                        SRB10.2


phx15776 (volume dump switches)
     switch_on and switch_off of the volume dump switches appears
     to fail for multi-segment files
phx15777 (Documentation :  Operators Handbook)
     Errors in MR10.1  version of PRPH TAP card  on pages 6-2 and
     6-14.
phx15799 (documentation)
     AG92, io_call write_record -segment description wrong
phx15806 (exec_com version 2)
     keyword &LF not recognized in a &print statement
phx15826 (AS multiplexer management)
     multiple dump_mpx commands harmful
phx15829 (The switch_on and switch_off commands.)
     Both  commands  fail  to  set the  incremental  and complete
     volume dump switches correctly.
phx15831 (FNP loading)
     We have not been able to load our 128k front ends
phx15834 (MRDS (dsl_$open))
     goes overboard on  the error messages when trying  to open a
     nonexistent database.
phx15853 (documentation)
     several   control   arguments   missing   from  walk_subtree
     documnetation
phx15888 (linus)
     the  store request  in linus bombs  out nastily  when a user
     tries to store more data in a input line than he has columns
     in the  input table if  the -input_file control  argument is
     used.
phx15890 (nd_handler_ / status_)
     If  nd_handler_  is  called  on   a  segment  with  a  vtoce
     connection  failure  (branch exists  but vtoce  doesn't), an
     out_of_bounds condition occurs at nd_handler_$cleanup|2432
phx15897 (Satellite 6M)
     Using  Rel 2.0  of Satellite  6M on  rel 2.1  of Mod  400 we
     cannot  initiate a  login sequence  to the  DPS6 or transfer
     files when Multics is the initiator.  In both cases the DPS6
     will hang.
phx15899 (forum 1.10)
     qedx info under forum is incorrect
phx15931 (Satellite 6M)
     Running RBTX  and TRANX at  the same time causes  the FNP to
     crash.
phx15933 (Satellite 6M)
     Non-conventional  names  cause  a  variety  of  results when
     pushing a file from Multics to the DPS6.










List of Fixed Errors          G-15                        SRB10.2


phx15938 (Satellite 6M)
     QUIT  processing  is not  well defined.   It is  possible to
     disable the function of the break  key or for Multics to get
     locked into discarding every data  packet.  Using Rel 2.0 of
     Satellite 6M on rel 2.1 of Mod 400.
phx15943 (linus_store)
     Too few items  in the first line of an  input file for linus
     can have disasterous effects.
phx15946 (bound_tc_priv$pxss)
     System crashes with FAULT/INTERRUPT WHILE ON PRDS because of
     an overflow  in bound_tc_priv$pxss|3043 when  it is checking
     to see if it should meter respose time.
phx15950 (audit)
     detach_audit got fatal process error when audit file went to
     msf.
phx15964 (xmail MR10.1)
     there  is  a  badly  placed error  message  in  mailing list
     function
phx15965 (xmail MR10.1)
     Missing entry in xmail_prompt_replies.gi.info
phx15978 (gcos_fms)
     User's input density arg is ignored.
phx15979 (gcos simulator)
     Simulator processes -block arg incorrectly.
phx15985 (exec_comm)
     &is_active_function does not work
phx15991 (display_psp)
     The display_psp command will fail  if there is a running fnp
     in  the configuration  which does  not support  the dump_fnp
     order.
phx15997 (monitor_quota)
     doesn't like it if the user it's warning (with -warn) is not
     logged in.
phx15998 (emacs)
     emacs doesnt know about pathnames on the "To" line.
phx16001 (ipc_)
     ipc_  has  an  entry   point,  convert_ipc_code_,  which  is
     documented as obsolete, yet  over 60 modules still reference
     it.
phx16019 (hardcore)
     memory reconfig can crash system
phx16022 (init_pvt, bootload)
     It  is impossible  to bootload a  system (either  in 10.0 or
     10.1) if a disk drive has an address greater than 32.











List of Fixed Errors          G-16                        SRB10.2


phx16037 (mrds pl1 subroutines)
     The -where clause in the dsl_ subroutines produces a runtime
     error if more than 3 attribute conditions are specified.
phx16048 (ioa_ and rawo)
     when  in  rawo,  the  behavior of  red  shift  with  ioa_ is
     reversed.
phx16049 (emacs regexp search mode)
     Function loses when a search string of * is entered.
phx16051 (Version 2 exec_com)
     Incorrect handling of null &else clause
phx16094 (system access and security)
     It  is  apparently  possible  for  a  person  attempting  to
     initially dial  into Multics to  be attached to  an existing
     proces that is not there own.
phx16099 (pl1 compiler)
     when  a file  dcl.  has explicit  "external static" defined,
     the link to the "fsb" is not created in the object segment.
phx16102 (Satellite 6M)
     If a  user uses the  quit  request or does a  BREAK and then
     releases, the DPS6 listener "hangs" up the subchannel.
phx16116 (fortran common blocks)
     when  using   -ansi77,  common  blocks   referenced  with  a
     equivalence  statement  generates  lots  of  storage  if the
     common block contains an array of character string variables
     and also causes binding errors.
phx16120 (mail system)
     If a  directory has initial  acls seg, a  mailbox created in
     that  directory has  null extended  access for  those access
     names in the initial acl list.
phx16127 (documentation error_messages.doc)
     Some   error   messages   are  missing   from   the  segment
     >doc>MR10.1>error_messages.doc, but present in the code.
phx16131 (T+D)
     Polts MR10.1 loads wrong controller type
phx16140 (Cobol, version 5.2)
     Compiler loops with certain report generator code.
phx16154 (Documentation)
     AW17-05 shows on page 136  that the escape character "\" for
     qedx is "/"
phx16155 (network - setup_arpanet.ec)
     setup_apranet.ec   does  not   answer  all   questions  when
     registering daemons.













List of Fixed Errors          G-17                        SRB10.2


phx16168 (T&D)
     Limitation  on  use  of  MDRs while  testing  for  load tape
     problem on MTU0610 tape handler.
phx16180 (EXL read_mail)
     exl rdm dies on "ls -fm /foo/ -ncs" subcommand
phx16217 (video_system)
     video system crashing on busy system.
phx16220 (rcp)
     The info file for setr says that a project administrator can
     set the  potential attribute field and  the potential access
     class.  He cannot set either.
phx16228 (Communications, FNP)
     Terminals using  output flow_control sometimes  experience a
     condition  whereupon  the  FNP  constantly  spurts  out  one
     character  for ever,  can only  be cured  by hanging  up the
     line.
phx16251 (hardcore fnp_multiplexer)
     fnp_multiplexer has bug which crashes system
phx16259 (astty_ (hypernet))
     astty_  masks  the  returned  error codes  from  two control
     orders.
phx16260 (dial_ctl_ (hypernet))
     dial_ctl_  has  a mal-formatted  ioa_ format  in one  of its
     error messages.
phx16263 (documentation)
     The  manual  AL39B  on   pages  3-18  and  3-21  incorrectly
     describes the hardware.
phx16295 (EXL read_mail)
     rdm subcommand  "ls -to /foo/ -ncs"  leads to stack overflow
     and kills your process
phx16298 (read_mail)
     read_mail can't determine the author of a message


_E_R_R_O_R_S _R_E_P_O_R_T_E_D _D_U_R_I_N_G _E_X_P_O_S_U_R_E _A_N_D _T_E_S_T

phx01510 (gcu command)
     doesn't let multics to gcos file coversions lines >80 char.
phx01578 (trace command)
     documentation has inconsistencies.
phx02130 (edm)
     gets hung looking for NL in runoff file.
phx02240 (expand_pathname_)
     entry add_suffix returns entryname with period.
phx02588 (send_mail)
     saves changes without a "w"









List of Fixed Errors          G-18                        SRB10.2


phx02730 (date_compiled)
     prints funny messages when invoked on an archive.
phx03083 (null_links AF)
     sometimes lists a link as null that has a target.
phx03182 (send_mail)
     save request uses current working directory
phx03465 (non_null_link and null_link)
     active functions have conflicting behaviour.
phx03473 (send_mail)
     seems to have a bug when the reply option is applied.
phx03573 (read_mail)
     are not always displayed in output with the list request.
phx03909 (hcs_$status)
     status for an entry with more than 100 names
phx04621 (send_mail)
     send_mail should validate command line addresses
phx04855 (send_mail)
     Poor send_mail user interface
phx05027 (emacs rmail mode)
     Claims mail came from wrong person
phx05032 (emacs rmail mode)
     emacs rmail dows not honor the acknowledge convention.
phx05136 (>exl>mlsys>send_mail)
     send_mail says messages sent  to some destinations when only
     one destination.
phx05137 (>exl>mlsys>send_mail)
     send_mail says messages hasn't been sent but has.
phx05239 (alm)
     the alm herald is premature
phx05254 (emacs)
     mail facility needs to return/request acknowledgements.
phx05342 (read_mail)
     doesn't consistently report "all messages have been deleted"
phx05384 (EMACS)
     rmail mode "Sent to" banner has too many blank lines.
phx05541 (sdm qx)
     sdm qx does not allow you to delete a LF as qedx does.


















List of Fixed Errors          G-19                        SRB10.2


phx05923 (read_mail)
     write  request  uses  message specifier  for  output segment
     name.
phx06050 (Emacs)
     ^U^XR  erroneously reports  "No mail  now" when  mail exists
     that you can read with the read_mail command.
phx06052 (audit)
     daf took an OOB fault.
phx06170 (io_call command and tty_)
     io get_chars shouldnt complain in AF mode about short record
phx06510 (volume reloader)
     It is silly to have to reload volumes one at a time
phx06699 (TTT/ttydim_)
     initial string for diablo1640_ack is useless
phx06718 (EXL audit)
     audit causes my process to become catatonic.
phx06818 (mail system)
     using  qedx -header  on a  send_message message  causes mail
     system to forget destination is mailbox and not person.
phx06843 (exp lisp compiler (2.9da2))
     doesn't diagnose missing source segment properly.
phx06849 (mail system)
     apparently cannot deal with strange time zones.
phx07147 (linus)
     store request from files doesn not honor quotes
phx07393 (read_mail)
     write malfunction
phx07598 (read_mail)
     Unnecessary and ungrammatical informative/error message
phx07628 (send_mail:  send and quit)
     When attempting to  quit after the message has  been sent to
     some but not all specified  destinations, the "still wish to
     quit?"  question makes a false statement.
phx07640 (quotient)
     SOMETIMES, the command "quotient 12 foo 12" faults.
phx07765 (EXL read_mail)
     Copied mail gets acknowledged to wrong person
phx07885 (EXL read_mail)
     Just told me "all messages have been deleted" when I had one
     left.















List of Fixed Errors          G-20                        SRB10.2


phx07891 (EXL send_mail)
     If -sv STR option is used, message is not sent to STR.sv.mbx
     if other cc's are present.
phx08122 (EXL emacs)
     Uses host_id_, which is not in default search rules
phx08161 (mail system)
     line counts have no relationship to anything.
phx08413 (mail system)
     reply -io -rfi refills header
phx08420 (io_call)
     Undefined order request error message is incorrect.
phx08784 (probe)
     let request assigns values improperly.
phx08833 (merge_ascii)
     When  invoked with  no arguments, it  prints a  4 line usage
     message   It should only print  a single line usage message.
     There are info segments for the more detailed information.
phx08834 (compare_ascii)
     usage message is to long
phx08913 (audit (specifically daf))
     daf gets  stuck and cranks  out nothing but cpu  time if the
     file is trashed.
phx08918 (ata, daf)
     If  an  audit_file is  unusable, daf  goes into  an infinite
     loop.
phx08934 (send_mail)
     send_mail  displays  "to"  fields  containing  quotes  in  a
     different format than  the user is supposed to  use to input
     them.
phx09003 (mail_system)
     The editor in send mail does not detect Syntax errors in the
     quit request.
phx09024 (Volume Dumper and Complete Reloads)
     The volume dumper needs to be able to load multiple physical
     volumes at a time.
phx09029 (Emacs RMAIL)
     Requires s access to containing dir.
phx09115 (compare_ascii)
     uses error_table_$badarg
phx09116 (compare_ascii)
     should reject usage as an active function














List of Fixed Errors          G-21                        SRB10.2


phx09121 (EXL mail system)
     Log destination indistinguishable from person destination
phx09174 (Multics lisp)
     emacs and internal tool ifd do not work from an inner ring
phx09235 (send_mail and send_message)
     can't  use  sdm  or  sm  directed  to  directory  with quota
     problem.
phx09253 (ring_zero_dump)
     Can't dump my stack_0 by segment number
phx09359 (read_mail reply info seg error)
     doesn't accept -ll, but takes -bf which isn't documented.
phx09409 (EXL mail system)
     Continues  to reply  even when  you refuse  to create target
     mailbox
phx09597 (EXL read_mail)
     The forward request doesn't allow the -log address.
phx09612 (safety_sw_on)
     Should use full pathnames in its error messages.
phx09651 (read_mail)
     Weird write request syntax does unexpected things
phx09721 (emacs send_mail)
     command to add acknowledge field
phx09752 (Emacs)
     EXL Emacs changes cursor position in window for no reason
phx09788 (read_mail)
     error message loops
phx10130 (send_mail -save)
     goes to default mailbox
phx10132 (read_mail)
     Read_mail deleted  my savebox.  I made  a foolish error, but
     the consequences should not have been so drastic.
phx10563 (EXL read_mail)
     reply request fumbles what looks like valid header
phx10667 (make_pps_tape)
     Does not clean up attachment when bad modes string given.
phx10991 (emacs ^X^S in send_mail)
     sends the mail  even if there are invalid  people in the To:
     or Cc:  fields.

















List of Fixed Errors          G-22                        SRB10.2


phx11086 (EXL read/send_mail)
     Says mail has been sent when it hasn't.
phx11088 (hardcore (verify_lock))
     should check the ioi_data lock.
phx11250 (EXL mail system)
     reply replies to from, not sender
phx11519 (manage_volume_pool)
     list selection arguments non-functional
phx11686 (video_support)
     Entering  a  backslash  followed  by  a  return  displays  a
     backslash on the screen.  This is wrong.
phx11715 (system intialization)
     disk configuration errors cause "unexpected fault" errors.
phx11729 (PL/I 27b)
     implementation restriction on size of the program
phx11740 (LINUS)
     FORTRAN subroutine cannot be declared to LINUS
phx11754 (exl emacs)
     rmail mode bombs out when reading my save mailbox
phx11768 (dump_vtoce)
     The dump_vtoce command should understand pathnames, too.
phx11869 (hardcore (system_startup_))
     Generates bogus syserr messages for unclaimed conditions.
phx11917 (video system/TTF)
     There isn't enough padding for 4800 baud VT132 insert/delete
     lines.
phx11955 (Executive mail)
     Attempting  to  delete  messages  in a  mailbox  without "d"
     extended access produces an incorrect message.
phx11956 (Executive mail)
     Doesn't list saveboxes with multiple component names.
phx11987 (xmail)
     The xmail editor does not behave as the video editor.
phx12009 (xmail)
     Response to questions
phx12077 (xmail, executive_mail)
     Why can't  xmail run on  top of audit_?  emacs  can, so it's
     not impossible.

















List of Fixed Errors          G-23                        SRB10.2


phx12078 (xmail)
     Links to mailing lists not (always) recognized.
phx12114 (read_mail (header parse))
     Should accept Remailed-from as a synonym for Remailed-by
phx12197 (EXL read_mail)
     Remains  convinced  it  knows  the mailbox  access,  even if
     changed
phx12330 (LINUS)
     store request using -if and -dm  does not work if input data
     contains unbalanaced quotes
phx12413 (xmail (MIT EXL, Phx UNB))
     Clears the whole terminal screen when F5 (esc r) is used.
phx12416 (read_mail)
     Has trouble with certain date formats.
phx12523 (Emacs RMAIL)
     c request puts malformed mail in a save box.
phx12524 (Executive mail)
     list summary fails when number of lines is greater than 999
phx12565 (Executive mail)
     executive mail on a vip7205 has various display problems
phx12610 (FAST)
     The info file for the add_line_numbers command has the wrong
     short name.
phx12622 (video)
     Video  does  me  wrong  when  I  am  typing  stuff  in while
     more_mode=clear.
phx12641 (lcp)
     lcp has its version number backwards
phx12665 (xmail)
     Internal programming error.  Won't talk to me.
phx12686 (audit)
     leaves iocbs in your process that can't be used again.
phx12698 (gcos environment)
     $ select does not work
phx12785 (xmail)
     executive_mail:  Segment already known  to process.  This is
     an internal programming error.
phx12791 (xmail)
     F5  clears entire  screen, even  if xmail  does not  own the
     entire screen.















List of Fixed Errors          G-24                        SRB10.2


phx12798 (Emacs mail mode/mail system)
     requires s access  to the dir containing a  mailbox in order
     for that mailbox to be referenced without a project id.
phx12799 (gcos tape I/O)
     Irrecoverable I/O  error, status 450100000000  while writing
     tape using gcos simulator.  Not a real error, and should not
     be picked up as such.
phx12803 (xmail)
     List Files option in Review Mail Files menu gets confused by
     multiple names on saveboxes within Personid.xmail dir.
phx12827 (mail system (read_mail))
     read_mail should check access on mbx before asking pointless
     questions
phx12912 (ioi)
     ioi_timer doesn't give up
phx13018 (xmail)
     Hitting  break   should  not  unconditionally   discard  any
     messages being constructed.
phx13056 (executive mail)
     The name of the mailfile is  not included in the printout of
     a mailfile requested by the print request (c).
phx13061 (exl read_mail subsystem on MIT)
     read_mail does not correctly determine access to the mailbox
     being read.
phx13064 (read_mail)
     Confusion abounds when there is no access to a savebox.
phx13073 (Mail System (send_mail))
     "-rql" is ignored if the input file is not found.
phx13102 (send_mail)
     send_mail  will  send a  log  copy to  the  sender's primary
     mailbox instead of putting it in the log mailbox.
phx13128 (audit_)
     Using ata with a audit_file_size=10, if the data in the file
     rolls  over  audit_$audit_detach truncates  the file  to the
     last  message,   when  it  should  set   the  bit  count  to
     audit_file_size.
phx13204 (window_call clear_region)
     window_call clear_region is  handing out contradictory error
     messages
phx13205 (xmail defaults)
     xmail  allows  you to  specify  a dprint  station  but there
     appears  to be  no way  of setting  the station  back to the
     system default.












List of Fixed Errors          G-25                        SRB10.2


phx13227 (executive mail)
     The  interaction  between  reconnecting  to  a  disconnected
     process that was operating in executive mail and the meaning
     given  to the  break is  devastating if  the thing  you were
     doing was replying to or sending mail.
phx13238 (audit)
     gives me  a fatal process  error when I  detach_audit if the
     audit file is an MSF.
phx13258 (xmail)
     error_table_$badopt  message  should be  accompanied  by the
     offending ctl_arg.
phx13271 (xmail)
     Allows  the  user  to  create  illegal  entrynames  and then
     refuses to recognize them.
phx13312 (AL-39 and AK-92 -- Processor and SWG)
     the   aNbd   family  of   instructions'  coding   format  is
     undocumented.
phx13322 (gcos card utility)
     when writing  a tape I encounter  a software error:  illegal
     machine operation in gcos card utility
phx13338 (video system include files)
     Error in include file window_status.incl.pl1
phx13391 (COBOL Version 5.1)
     Dynamic  access to  indexed sequential file  , direct access
     followed by sequential read results  in first record of file
     to be next read.
phx13395 (pit)
     The variable pit.login_responder is too short.
phx13401 (xmail)
     xmail 1.5 still doesn't restore terminal modes, specifically
     oflow  and  the -osr  characters.  I  imagine that  it's the
     fault of the video system.
phx13411 (xmail)
     xmail   doesn't  list   mailboxes  with   names  other  than
     foo.sv.mbx.
phx13426 (Lister,listin)
     Error msg  states that <  sign is missing  from a particular
     line, which it is not.  If  you remove the line referred to,
     it finds another line, etc.
phx13427 (Fortran Compiler)
     The INQUIRE keyword "FILE=" is mis-spelled as "FILENAME=".
phx13469 (print_apt_entry)
     pae was not upgraded for multiple procs required.
phx13526 (bind)
     outputs improper pathname










List of Fixed Errors          G-26                        SRB10.2


phx13532 (fortran)
     Bad code  was introduced into the  optimizing code generator
     in the fix to bug 345.  This affects global pointer register
     use.
phx13550 (fortran)
     Using  ansi77  option,  these  two  programs  get  dissimale
     results.
phx13551 (read_mail)
     Errors  in   the  print_original  request,   etc.,  are  not
     recommended.
phx13569 (tape_archive)
     Can't rl out of a tape_archive compaction.
phx13630 (WORDPRO List Processing create_list command)
     Per  AZ98A  pg 7-2  para  2.  "Fields  ....If the  fld value
     contains any rec or fld  delimiters, then it" (I assumed the
     fld value) "must be quoted."  That solution results in error
     condition  ...ASCII  value  where  pointer  expected..to cls
     command.
phx13639 (io_call)
     "io control  switchname foo" gives  incorrect information in
     error message.
phx13663 (audit)
     daf  allows you  to specify the  current audit  file for the
     output file.
phx13674 (linus.temporary relations.)
     i cannot use temporary  relations in predicates joining many
     relations.
phx13720 (MRDS (cmdmi))
     create_mrds_dm_include  puts  the output  file in  the wrong
     directory
phx13735 (read_mail)
     print -idl with no  other arguments gives misleading message
     when used after deleting the last message in the mailbox
phx13739 (emacs rmail)
     rmail  has stopped  working for mailbox  names in  to and cc
     fields.
phx13779 (executive mail)
     reply creates  a new mail file  when filing a copy  to a new
     mailbox name without interrogating  you.  if it is mispelled
     you get a junk mailbox.
phx13793 (executive mail)
     mail file deletion of empty mailbox doesn't work
phx13795 (Fortran)
     Optimized version  of a program  gives different (incorrect)
     results from non-optimized version.
phx13809 (executive_mail both installed and exl)
     apparent  hangup in  reply setup  possibly related  to large
     carbonee list.







List of Fixed Errors          G-27                        SRB10.2


phx13825 (Mail system.)
     Read mail write request does not behave as expected.
phx13836 (send_mail)
     The send_mail command does not completely validate mailboxes
     in >udd>Daemon>mailboxes specified on the command line.
phx13858 (fortran)
     the   parser   leaves   a   field  in   the   format  symbol
     uninitialized.
phx13866 (fortran_io)
     list directed character constants on input should be able to
     span  records,  by  the  ansi77  standard,  our  fortran_io_
     declares a missing string delimiter.
phx13867 (fortran)
     The  use  of an  internal  file character  string in  a READ
     statement for the optimizer does  not set attributes for the
     character string  as being altered.  Thus  the optimizer may
     co-erce the string into the text section.
phx13868 (fortran_io)
     The parsing  of a format  specification with an  I/O list is
     controlled  by  the  format,  not the  list.   It  should be
     controlled by the list and not the format.
phx13869 (fortran_io)
     Extremely  small negative  numbers which  go to  default 0.0
     output will also have the negative sign.
phx13871 (fortran_io)
     A double precision variable when printed under an exlpicit E
     format prints with a D, rather than an E as specified.
phx13873 (fortran_io)
     Fortran_io list directed input  for booleans does not accept
     anything other  than T F t  f .T .F .t  .f, when it receives
     anything else  it declares an  error thus TRUE  .TRUE.  etc.
     are not accepted.
phx13879 (fortran-io)
     Use of INQUIRE immediately after a CLOSE of that file causes
     a null pointer reference in fortran_io_.
phx13899 (working_dir active function)
     working_dir  should  requote  its  return arg,  in  case the
     directory name contains a space.
phx13900 (file_output)
     file_output  fails to  attach a  switch to  a dsegment  in a
     directory containing a space in its name.
phx13901 (hardcore)
     processid's of readers should be maintained in dirlockt_seg
phx13939 (IMFT)
     Failed to report a transmission error










List of Fixed Errors          G-28                        SRB10.2


phx13944 (executive_mail)
     invocation of  xmail followed by QUIT,  release, and another
     try to enter xmail left vestiges of xmail around SOMEWHERE.
phx13951 (xmail)
     Unable to discard mail files.
phx13958 (xmail)
     The  option  "Review Mail  Files" allows  mailf files  to be
     created, but can they be listed with the List option?
phx13963 (>ldd>unb)
     >ldd>unb>s>bound_forum_.s.archive's bit count does not agree
     with the # of records in use for it.
phx13965 (fortran)
     use of a subscript of the form (i,0,...)  where the array is
     dimensioned  with  (n:constant,   ........)   will  generate
     incorrect bound/subscript calculation code.
phx13974 (probe)
     null pointer fault in probe_break_handler_
phx13977 (Emacs rmail)
     If you type "r" to  reply to a message, followed immediately
     by "^C", you wind up replying to yourself.
phx13978 (binder)
     Claims to be version of Thurdsay (sic), January 15, 1981
phx13979 (forum_list_meetings)
     Reports spurious non-matching of starnames.
phx14078 (sss (list_sub_tree))
     list_sub_tree produces silly output.
phx14093 (xmail)
     Under the general  help menu of xmail, there  is a selection
     called "getting out".  This says  to use the function key F4
     to  get out.   This is  not helpful  for users  of terminals
     without function  keys.  This may occur  other places, but I
     have not seen any.
phx14096 (gcos_fms)
     gcos_fms  will not  load a multisegment  file correctly gets
     out_of_bound_ error
phx14101 (fortran_io)
     INQUIRE's FILE= requires the filename be 'ltrim'd.
phx14102 (fortran_io)
     Internal  file  WRITE  should  return a  blank  filled first
     record for an empty FORMAT.
phx14103 (fortran)
     Parser  does   not  recognize  the   syntax:   CHARACTER*(*)
     FUNCTION var (...)












List of Fixed Errors          G-29                        SRB10.2


phx14104 (fortran_io)
     X format  should not put  spaces into the  output record, it
     should only move the index.
phx14107 (fortran_io)
     Numeric  input formats  (READ, DECODE)  may alter  the input
     data.
phx14130 (Executive mail)
     Behavior  of  xmail upon  the arrival  of new  incoming mail
     confuses the user as to what  he should do to process it and
     creates extra work for him.
phx14162 (display_error_list)
     internal info files are incomplete
phx14219 (IMFT)
     Losing segments.
phx14224 (ol_dump)
     On MR9.1/870Ms "why" misses the correct mc`s.
phx14252 (msf_manager_$acl_list)
     should be able to return the  ACL on the MSF when the caller
     has s to dir containing the MSF, but null to the MSF itself.
phx14270 (read_mail)
     Adds  extraneous blank  line to  output of  print -no_header
     when printing an interactive message.
phx14277 (fortran I/O)
     A  double  precision constant  cannot  be read  into  a real
     variable with list-directed input.
phx14278 (fortran I/O)
     D  format  is  used  by  list-directed  WRITE's  for  double
     precision values.
phx14279 (fortran I/O)
     Numeric input under an F  edit descriptor fails if the field
     width is very large.
phx14284 (fortran I/O)
     A  unary plus  sign is  not allowed in  a format  on a scale
     factor.
phx14285 (fortran I/O)
     There should be no restriction on 'w' and 'd' in D, E, F and
     G formats.
phx14286 (fortran I/O)
     The FORM attribute  of the OPEN statement is  not handled as
     specified by the FORTRAN/77 Standard.
phx14287 (fortran I/O)
     The current implementation of PAUSE  does not conform to the
     FORTRAN/77 Standard.












List of Fixed Errors          G-30                        SRB10.2


phx14292 (fortran I/O)
     There is a bug in formatted output under Iw.m format.
phx14299 (Volume Retriever)
     unable to rebuild a directory using -subtree.
phx14322 (COBOL)
     Attempt to allocate oversize  array causes loop at execution
     time.
phx14330 (emacs)
     RMAIL does not always generate legal Arpanet headers.
phx14354 (GCOS simulator)
     Seems to  be putting out  a lot of  unnecessary output lines
     that it didn't use to.
phx14366 (qedx)
     no longer protects against typos such as w/abc/def/
phx14384 (Version 2 exec_com (v2ec))
     ignores continuation lines after  comment lines, contrary to
     the documentation.
phx14389 (MRDS)
     In  a single  relation MRDS data  base the  primary index is
     composed of  11 fields, when a  retrieval is attempted using
     the whole key  or concatenated parts of the  key there is no
     problem if the fields are not concatenated no data is found.
phx14409 (load_mpc)
     Reliably  get  "Unexpected  level   7  status  errors  where
     bound_tolts_ never appears to have the same problem with the
     same hardware.
phx14450 (LINUS)
     It is not poosible to write , under LINUS,files of retrieved
     information greater than something like 1250 pages.
phx14451 (LINUS)
     I have problems when i want to use user set function on data
     wich have been calculated by user scalar function.
phx14478 (gcos_fms)
     Overflows the KST
phx14487 (abbrev)
     abbrev  cannot  be  spliced  into  a  process  unless  it is
     explicitly terminated first.
phx14490 (message)
     When  working with  a test  version of  bound_gcos_tss_ in a
     working   directory  the   error_message:   gtss_mcfc_init_:
     Entry      not      found.        Could      not      obtain
     >exl>gcos_system>o>GTSS.MCFC(FILES NAMES CALLERS_(1 2 3 4)).
     The  character  string   >exl>gcos_system>o  should  be  the
     referencing directory.











List of Fixed Errors          G-31                        SRB10.2


phx14493 (link command)
     Combination of control args with no paths yields no error or
     usage message.
phx14521 (bad error format in gtss_drl_defil_)
     error in ioa_ call format
phx14523 (MAM System (AK50-02))
     Miscellaneous errors, from the MR10.0 version
phx14528 (Firmware)
     Firmware  for  MTP610  (rev  l2)  does  not  follow protocol
     outlind inthe EPS-2 for the release (20o) command.
phx14530 (delete command)
     The delete  command leaves segments  intiated (no-name) when
     the segment has the safety_switch on and the user answers no
     to the "Should I delete it?"  query.
phx14568 (Fortran)
     Possible error in  INQUIRE statement.  Incorrect information
     returned.
phx14573 (system subroutines)
     the  explanation  string  in  command_query_  is  not  built
     correctly.
phx14579 (documentation AL39B)
     Some errors and omissions.
phx14582 (Volume Dumper)
     Will lose track of the  previous volumes contents in certain
     circumstances.
phx14588 (documentation (directory salvager))
     Something should explain about security  -oos and how to get
     rid of it.
phx14589 (MCS)
     X.25 multiplexor doesn't handle EOP breaks properly.
phx14592 (format_document_)
     format_document_$string truncates long input lines.
phx14614 (delete_message command)
     doesn't complain when use with no arguments
phx14616 (set_fortran_common)
     sfc foo only works when foo.fortran is in lower case.
phx14625 (emacs 12.0bEXL)
     Window display is loused up.
phx14631 (enter_imft_request)
     Refuses valid requests.















List of Fixed Errors          G-32                        SRB10.2


phx14639 (test_tape Online T&D Aids)
     rejects the control argument (-vl)  that it tells you to use
     in its usage message.
phx14655 (save_dir_info)
     When  trying  to  save_dir_info   through  a  link,  I  get:
     save_dir_info:   Incorrect  access  to  directory containing
     entry.  >udd>Multics>Roach>source
phx14664 (AG91)
     misspells the gate_err condition as gate_error.
phx14665 (rename)
     -name  doesn't use  expand_pathname_, and  it misreports the
     unexpanded pathname in its error message.
phx14679 (dump_vtoce)
     Does not interpret all of the information in votce.
phx14723 (forum)
     the ls and pr commands will  not take a person_id with a "'"
     inside it
phx14728 (fortran I/O)
     In 'ansi77' mode, list-directed  output records should start
     with  a space  carriage control character  unless the output
     unit has the 'carriage' attribute.
phx14731 (dial_out 1.3a)
     When  the host  is unavailable on  the X.25 line,  you get a
     garbage message.
phx14734 (message segments)
     The      module      mbx_mseg_      does      not     return
     error_table_$not_seg_type for some entries if the input path
     names a directory.
phx14735 (Video System)
     Attempting to  use the "print" command  to print large (>250
     record) files  results sometimes in a  storage condition, or
     in a Fatal Process Error.
phx14752 (COBOL)
     REPLACING clause with COPY verb not supported.  REPLACE verb
     not supported.
phx14754 (absentee and/or version 2 exec_com)
     Incorrectly executes some lines within a do group.
phx14756 (COBOL 5.2)
     Problem with GENERATE AGGREGATE DESCRIPTORS.
phx14766 (exl read_mail)
     read_mail will take a null_pointer fault
phx14769 (EXL rdm)
     Gets a reference through null  pointer because of bad header
     on mail.











List of Fixed Errors          G-33                        SRB10.2


phx14783 (Fortran)
     Problem  with namelist  when used in  main program  and in a
     subroutine when both are compiled together.
phx14787 (dial_out/X.25)
     The  destination  seems   to  be  unnecessarily  restrictive
     somewhere in either dial_out or the TTY support of X.25.
phx14791 (switch_on/switch_off)
     Can't  turn  on  the  incremental  or  complete  volume dump
     switches.
phx14797 (alm writeup in swg)
     The  paragraph  describing the  firstref psuedo-op  does not
     give the calling sequence that  will be used when the linker
     calls the first reference trap program.
phx14820 (Documentation)
     I can't find the writeup on discard_.
phx14821 (Subsystem Writers Guide)
     The explanation of hcs_$get_user_effmode mentions an include
     file named access_modes_values.incl.pl1, but no such include
     file exists and access_mode_values.incl.pl1 is for something
     else.
phx14823 (exec_com)
     Segment not found errorrs are hidden
phx14828 (MPM Subroutines AG93-04)
     does not document hcs_$change_bc and $change_bc_seg.
phx14829 (value facility)
     Cannot value_delete items created by value_$set_data
phx14838 (hcs_$initiate documentation or replacement)
     hcs_$initiate  has been  moved to  the obsolete  part of the
     Subroutines  (AG93) manual.   This implies  users should not
     use it, but  the ability to give a  specific refname is then
     lost.
phx14844 (forum)
     The exl forum does not  have -output_fill make -fill for the
     print request the default.
phx14862 (Error list management.)
     The 'enter_error_list' 'add_tr' command fails.
phx14864 (Exl audit)
     Gets size condition
phx14872 (exl delete_dir)
     exl  delete_dir  won't delete  a  MRDS db,  because  it gets
     confused by the db.control segment.
phx14882 (page control)
     Page pinning is inoperative in MR10n1 (but not MR10.0)












List of Fixed Errors          G-34                        SRB10.2


phx14883 (unlink -qye)
     The unlink command with the  "-qye" control argument use the
     word "Delete" when it means  "Unlink" and it chases the link
     unnecessarily to tell the user that the target is protected.
phx14892 (copy (exl version))
     Produces unwarranted error message
phx14898 (EXL forum)
     Usage message for the add_project request is incorrect.
phx14899 (Volume Reloader)
     reload_volume sometimes  outputs a *null*  get the following
     volumes message.
phx14900 (Documentation)
     Documentation for reload_volume -save is incomplete.
phx14906 (PL/I)
     Incorrect code generated for do-end statements.
phx14910 (probe)
     Gives message  which I find hard  to extract the information
     from.
phx14914 (Documentation - MPM Commands (AG92-05))
     My  shinny new  AG92-05 seems to  be missing  the writeup on
     reorder_archive.
phx14915 (help Command)
     help  couldn't find  an info  seg with  a 32-character entry
     name.
phx14917 (probe)
     attempt to reference thru null pointer when using the status
     request with no breakpoints set
phx14918 (mvt_)
     help file is inconsistent.
phx14920 (emacs)
     logged in via tymnet x.25  (b.h000.005); enter emacs and get
     no response; NL does not help; have to BREAK to get out.
phx14923 (x25, Tymnet, ???)
     Sending  more  than 97  characters  in rapid  succession can
     cause an X.25 channel to hang indefinitely.
phx14925 (AG92, et al (Commands and AFs Manual))
     The  description  for  the  print_terminal_types  command is
     missing from  AG92 and the  AW17 C&AF Pocket  Guide.  (It is
     available as an info seg.)
phx14930 (executive mail)
     Error in filing message.














List of Fixed Errors          G-35                        SRB10.2


phx14937 (tty_block_xfer mode)
     problem with block-begin
phx14939 (convert_date_to_binary)
     incorrectly receiving error message for day of week
phx14945 (compare_ascii)
     When the user fails to supply a path to -of, cpa uses one of
     the control arguments as the pathname.
phx14948 (fortran)
     Fortran (both optimizing and non-optimizing) can produce BAD
     array referencing in certain  cases of large address offsets
     from the start of a region (common or stack).
phx14953 (MPM Subroutines AG93-04)
     error in mode_string_$parse
phx14954 (MOH AM81-02B)
     says min memory is 384K in one place, 512K in another.
phx14957 (create_list)
     more on previous mprf 8242
phx14960 (video and/or print command)
     I cannot  print a multisegment  file with the  print command
     under the video system.  It works fine with video off.
phx14970 (MAM System AK50-02A)
     omits ms_set_acl from Appendix F.
phx14973 (Fortran User's Guide CC70-01B)
     typo.
phx14979 (fortran)
     The optimizing compiler fails if the LEN function is applied
     to a catenation.
phx14982 (msf_manager_)
     documentation of  status codes for  msf_manager_$get_ptr and
     msf_manager_$msf_get_ptr is incorrect.
phx14983 (msf_manager_$msf_get_ptr)
     Entry point  will create a single  segment file (contrary to
     the documentation)
phx14984 (X.25)
     It  is impossible  to use a  block mode  terminal over X.25.
     This use to work about 6 months ago.  Now its does not.
phx14991 (info seg)
     misspelling in linkage_section.gi.info
phx14993 (epr)
     Is  now   obsolete  -  actually  it   takes  linkage  errors
     referencing obsolete software.














List of Fixed Errors          G-36                        SRB10.2


phx14994 (SSS -- read_password_)
     read_password_  attempts  to  call  an  entry  which  is not
     externally available.
phx14999 (doc)
     the documentation for find_include_file_ is in error.
phx15001 (MRPG)
     Storage condition raised when used in conjunction with LINUS
phx15011 (Forum)
     forum  goto  request to  non-existent  meeting while  *in* a
     meeting leaves you in *no* meeting.
phx15013 (exl ted)
     g*/foo/ s/foo// is a noop because of a bug.
phx15014 (IMFT)
     IMFT fails if JSLove.* has  "sma" access to target directory
     at foreign site.
phx15015 (documentation)
     Why is hcs_$initiate obsolete?
phx15024 (sort_seg)
     non-terminating when using /$/
phx15028 (window_io_)
     -height is not an acceptable control argument
phx15030 (Fortran)
     Due to a bug fix error  in the optimizing code generator, it
     is possible  in certain program  cases to cause  an infinite
     loop in flushing references to a variable from registers.
phx15031 (adjust_bit_count command)
     abc altered the contents of a file, not just adjusted it.
phx15032 (documentation:  AG91-03)
     Missing asterisk.
phx15034 (gcos_tss command)
     gcos_tss gets an error and quits  when it is invoked and the
     user is already using window_call.
phx15060 (poll_mpc)
     Logging zero data for eurc's.
phx15061 (fortran compiler fails in optimizer)
     A large  (3800-line) fortran program fails  in the optimizer
     in ansi77  mode.  In ansi66  mode there is  no problem.  The
     test  program  is  compiled  with  -card  -sv2  -ot  -ansi77
     options.
phx15067 (tape_archive)
     encountered an error while attempting to update a segment on
     my tape, using the tape archive update command













List of Fixed Errors          G-37                        SRB10.2


phx15088 (io_error_summary)
     fails to report some detailed status info.
phx15089 (send_mail)
     send_mail restricts foreign user ids needlessly.
phx15094 (hardcore)
     smdq on the root will crash the system.
phx15095 (documentation (CP51-01B))
     Errors in example on page 3-7 regarding function keys.
phx15097 (Info files)
     ttt_info_.info  does  not  include   a  description  of  the
     ttt_info_$function_key_data entrypoint.
phx15099 (print_imft_sites (EXL))
     Seems to like nulls (sometimes more than others)
phx15106 (hardcore)
     Directory damage can produce objects whose deleting destroys
     the entire file system.
phx15110 (remote_control_)
     >exl>net>e>remote_control_  will  not process  a msg  to the
     control mbx  as a quit signal  if the msg exists  in the mbx
     before the process goes blocked.
phx15112 (fortran)
     Ansi66  descriptors  appear to  generate  a bit-count  for a
     field  size which  is 36 times  too short (should  be a word
     count).
phx15113 (pl1)
     Fortran  passes  character  array  descriptors  from  ansi66
     compilations  with 'packed'  = "0"b, to  indicate words, and
     multipliers  given  in  words.   pl1  seems  to  ignore this
     information.
phx15120 (set_time_zone command)
     default time zone not as per documentation AG92-05
phx15121 (mail)
     unable to deliver mail message
phx15122 (mail)
     duplication of messages received
phx15130 (TED Editor)
     The "h" tabout request replaces the HT character with spaces
     in  addition  to  replacing  the  pseudo-tab  character with
     spaces.
phx15132 (ol_dump)
     Does not display the error code in machine conditions.
phx15135 (Documentation, AM81-02B)
     losta a paragrapgh on page 9-36.












List of Fixed Errors          G-38                        SRB10.2


phx15142 (hardcore (verify_lock))
     Any crawlout with a directory  locked for writing will crash
     the system.
phx15146 (PL/I)
     code of assignment of parameter is generated incorrectly
phx15148 (probe)
     incorrect error message from probe  when using sc request to
     print source code
phx15154 (EXL linus)
     The save_format request can generate an invalid exec_com.
phx15155 (LINUS info seg)
     The LINUS formatting_options.gi.info could be more useful.
phx15159 (list_daemon_requests)
     The -lg control arg doesn't work for the mn1_prnt RQT.
phx15166 (MPM Ref Guide)
     Diagram on p G-6 is incorrect.
phx15169 (Tape error rates during system saves.)
     compairing tape errors from two saves recently, the one done
     under multics was almost twice the Bos version.
phx15174 (Documentation (AG92-05))
     dump_vtoce is missing from this manual.
phx15175 (Documantation (AG92-05))
     Mis-documentation in the INDEX
phx15176 (exec_com (v2))
     &set in &attach mode in a subsystem seems to have unpleasant
     results
phx15177 (exec_com (v2))
     syntax error in ascii segment  is an awful error message for
     "missing exec com label"
phx15178 (Documentation)
     The info segments for the system command/AF and system_info_
     subroutine were not updated to reflect the new functionality
     installed today.
phx15180 (EXL move (extended object stuff))
     An  unnecessary  warning  message is  generated  when moving
     mailboxes.
phx15181 (login and connection)
     Connected  to process  without identification of  user ID or
     password.
















List of Fixed Errors          G-39                        SRB10.2


phx15191 (set_lock_$unlock)
     If  a   process  lacks  write  access   to  the  lock  word,
     set_lock_$unlock signals the no_write_permission condition.
phx15192 (x25 subchannel terminal access and parameter control)
     When using x25 subchannels from various sources onto various
     Multics    systems,     a    variety    of     effects    on
     echoing/LF/CR/timing/...   are  seen.   Is  there  a  way to
     determine/report/directly set the NIM far-end parameters.
phx15198 (mrds)
     cmdb drops  portions of a  comment block when  producing the
     list segment via the "-list" control argument.
phx15201 (ol_dump)
     Try "proc all" in ERF 36.  It loops.
phx15208 (abbrev)
     The  abbrev  ".l"  request  indicates  that  my  profile  is
     damaged.
phx15215 (Fortran)
     Fortran does  not recognize the  long forms for  the %global
     options check_multiple and  no_check_multiply.  It currently
     only recognizes ckmpy and nckmpy which are not documented in
     AT58.
phx15223 (documentaton (CP51-01B))
     The fortran menu sections do  not indicate that one MUST use
     an ansi77 character array.
phx15230 (ol_dump)
     fails sometimes to dump segments
phx15234 (Include file for iox_entries.incl.pl1)
     Line  8 has  an invalid  declaration for  iox_$close_file in
     that there is  a comma missing after the  char(*) and before
     the fixed bin(35).
phx15237 (Documentation (MOH -AM81-02))
     Description  of  the  set_drive_usage  (sdu)  command  has a
     reference to an un-documented command.
phx15239 (AG91-03, Reference Manual)
     In Appendix  H, on page  14, in the push  operator, the line
     "eax7 pr1" should be "eax7 1".
phx15245 (info segs)
     "help greater" returns info on "exists" active function, not
     "greater" af.  >doc>info>greater.info  contains text only on
     the "exists" af.
phx15246 (probe)
     Probe's stack request prints  octal garbage for the pathname
     of return_to_ring_0_.
phx15251 (IMFT (pull))
     The specific  acl requirement is  an incredible pain  in the
     neck.









List of Fixed Errors          G-40                        SRB10.2


phx15261 (dial-out X25 to datapac via tymnet)
     I cannot dial_out via X25 into datapac through tymnet by any
     known method, including ones that work OK when tymnet called
     via tty-channel.
phx15266 (gtss)
     gtss$initialize:   Improper  mode   specification  for  this
     device.  Could not obtain terminal modes
phx15272 (GCOS encapsulation)
     degression in rel 10.1
phx15273 (xmail)
     reference to nonexistent error code in xmail.
phx15277 (GFMS)
     gfms fails, message is "Could not find catalog sector"
phx15279 (gcos)
     impossible fault
phx15281 (gtss)
     EXL gtss aborts when invoked in a "-modes mcmd" environment
phx15282 (MRDS commands (cmdmi))
     Uses wrong dir for the created include file.
phx15283 (MRDS commands (cmdmi))
     Leaves the created include file with improper access set.
phx15286 (iocbx.incl.pl1)
     iocbx.incl.pl1 was changed incompatibly,  but not all of its
     users were recompiled.
phx15291 (EXL extended objects (set_acl))
     Does not handle MSFs correctly.
phx15292 (COBOL Report Writer control fields)
     The COBOL compiler will not support qualified field names as
     control  fields  in  the  Report  Writer.   Invalid  code is
     generated  in  the  file  "rwdd.incl.cobol"  for  shadow and
     previous fields.
phx15295 (mos_edac_summary)
     The mos_edac_summary command encounters  a segment not found
     fault when the -day_limit option is used.
phx15296 (mos_edac_summary command documentation)
     The mos_edac_summary command documentation does not describe
     the -day_limit or -limit options.
phx15313 (ipc_ documentation)
     MPM doc of the argument list doesn't match the actual list
phx15329 (Documentation)
     The info  file for archive_table was  not updated to reflect
     the new features installed today.













List of Fixed Errors          G-41                        SRB10.2


phx15342 (Fortran (10.1))
     Compilation  of  a  program   with  -ot  and  -ansi77  gives
     reference thru null pointer by optimizer.
phx15346 (exl forum)
     editing requests following first  (maybe subsequent, too) \f
     don't get done
phx15352 (Fortran)
     Fortran truncates an existing  object segment when -check is
     specified.
phx15356 (X.25 interface)
     X.3 terminal parameters are not set right for TELENET.
phx15361 (documentation (AG93-04))
     Error in documentation for sub_err_.
phx15363 (fortran)
     Both optimizing and non-optimizing code generators forget to
     reserve pr1  if they do a  catenation of char*(*) parameters
     and shorten the stack.
phx15377 (hardcore)
     hcs_$get_ring_brackets shouldn't require s permission on the
     containing  directory  if you  have  non-null access  to the
     branch.
phx15378 (fortran)
     The size allocated to entry  information in the stack is one
     word  too  small for  the  optimizing code  generator.  This
     causes  fatal  process errors  in  certain cases  of dynamic
     temporary allocation.
phx15382 (lisp)
     A bunch of lisp include files are missing
phx15384 (exl Emacs)
     Exl emacs  redisplay takes car-or-cdr of  a number errors in
     redisplay-window on a tvi920.
phx15386 (Version 2 exec_com in >sss)
     The  last control  on the &trace  line is in  effect for all
     options.
phx15389 (>exl>eod>e>bound_fscom2_)
     copy_dir does not copy the entire segment at times.
phx15408 (MRDS)
     Searches on secondary indices  in databases predating MR10.1
     may fail.
phx15415 (documentation)
     The  subsystem  info segs  for  rmdb were  not  shipped with
     MR10.1.
phx15419 (on)
     'on'  command  does  not  print  last  character  of message
     string, and uses obsolete include file.










List of Fixed Errors          G-42                        SRB10.2


phx15420 (fortran)
     Adjustable  arrays  do not  conform to  the Standard  in '77
     mode.
phx15425 (archive_table)
     The  archive_table command's  error message  concerning it's
     lack  of  ability  to  handle  *archive*  path  starnames is
     incorrect.
phx15428 (set_max_length)
     set_max_length  will  no  longer  set the  max  length  of a
     segment to 261120 (255K).
phx15431 (EXL linus)
     Too many error messages.
phx15436 (display_pnotice -long)
     display_pnotice  -long only  prints the  program name  and a
     blank line.  The default output is more useful.
phx15437 (display_pnotice)
     "display_pnotice  {object_seg}"  says  invalid  argument and
     does  not output  what it thinks  is invalid.   Hard to work
     with when the person said ([segs **]) on the command line.
phx15438 (display_pnotice of source archive)
     If all components of a source archive do not have protection
     notices, a warning to such will come out for all components;
     but then display_pnotice tries to  run on the archive itself
     and gets a typename not found error.
phx15441 (IPS mask subroutines)
     Alignment   required   by   hcs_$(set   reset)_ips_mask  and
     create_ips_mask_ do not match.
phx15443 (Telenet PAD software)
     The Telenet  X.25 PAD parameters numbers  10 ["add line-feed
     after 80 output chars"] and 13 ["echo <LF> on <CR>"] are not
     being set correctly by Multics software.
phx15451 (fortran - nested builtin functions)
     The  expression,  asin (sqrt  (1.0)), produces  an erroneous
     fault indicating  that asin must be  called with an argument
     <= 1.0.
phx15467 (vfile_)
     get_key operation  can do strange  things to the  iocb under
     certain circumstances
phx15484 (display_pnotice of archive dies part way)
     display_pnotice will not completely process an archive if it
     cannot  handle  a component  because of  a suffix  not being
     supported.
phx15494 (AG93-04)
     The description of iox_$init_standard_iocbs is wrong.
phx15496 (EXL send_mail over Internet)
     Malforms return  paths so mail  cannot be replied  to on the
     foreign host.








List of Fixed Errors          G-43                        SRB10.2


phx15497 (video system)
     The  video  system could  be more  optimal with  really dumb
     terminals.
phx15502 (Documentation (AM83A))
     Error in description of the bool builtin.
phx15511 (send_mail)
     The  control arguments  -cc, -to,  -from, and  -reply_to are
     supposed to look for "addresses"  to follow.  It is possible
     to invoke send_mail, without complaint, if the addresses are
     omitted.
phx15516 (>ldd)
     There are lots of dirs that have ring brackets of 4,4 rather
     than 7,7.
phx15517 (video system)
     First character of output is lost after a break.
phx15524 (test_tape)
     incorrect usage message when invoked without any arguments.
phx15527 (Fortran)
     data  statements  doe  not  allow  the  conversion  of real,
     complex, and double precision constants into integer.  (ANSI
     77 9.2)
phx15528 (Fortran)
     Data statements do not allow character substring expressions
     (ANSI 77 9.1)
phx15529 (Fortran)
     Data  statements do  not allow  integer constant expressions
     for subscript and substring expressions.  (ANSI 77 9.2)
phx15530 (IMFT)
     Something   (the   line,   the   code)   is   really  BUSTED
     mysteriously.  It hangs, and comes suddenly to life when you
     send it a QUIT.
phx15533 (fortran optimizer)
     incorrect  result  when  fortran program  compiled  with the
     optimizer
phx15550 (active functions and brackets)
     Typing  [[wd] gives  the system response:   "Brackets do not
     balance".  But typing [[[wd]] does not.
phx15554 (x25_mpx)
     Will   not   allow   dial_out  destinations   of   the  form
     "x29,31060018310000" even though they are legal.
phx15557 (hcs_$get_user_access_modes)
     hcs_$get_user_access_modes  returns junk  when the entryname
     is a directory.












List of Fixed Errors          G-44                        SRB10.2


phx15559 (dial_out)
     If dial_out gets line_status_pending,  it should not hang up
     the line.
phx15566 (Linus)
     Linus  fails  with a  Segment-fault error  if more  than one
     macro path is provided on the linus command line.
phx15567 (manage_volume_pool.info)
     Missing mvp.info name so that "help mvp" can be found.
phx15570 (Answering Service)
     Attempting  to  load  a  multiplexor  with  zero subchannels
     causes a null pointer fault crawlout of ring 0 in the AS.
phx15572 (Documentation:  AG93-04)
     Some problems in the msf_manager_ documentation.
phx15596 (EXL PL/1 compiler)
     gets   error  313   when  optimized,   compiles  ok  without
     optimizer.
phx15597 (fortran)
     Incorrect code  is generated by  the non-optimizing compiler
     (both ft/9 and ft/10.1) for  a complex logical expression in
     an if statement.
phx15605 (send_mail)
     took a not_in_write_bracket condition
phx15611 (MPM Commands (AG92-05))
     does  not   include  documentation  for   dial_out  command,
     although AN50-06 says it is documented there.
phx15614 (forum installation)
     The subsystem info segments were not installed.  The command
     info segments are missing the addnames.
phx15615 (linus)
     linus blows up when -ag has no arguments.
phx15618 (forum_list_meetings.info, flsm.info)
     The  help  file   forum_list_meetings.info  is  missing  the
     addname of flsm.info.
phx15620 (AG91-03 documentation)
     The documentation of the Common  Access Class Ceiling has an
     error in the example.
phx15624 (dial_out)
     The  recent  dial_out  installation   did  not  include  the
     creation  of links  to subsystem  info files  in >doc>ss and
     some request info files are missing addnames.
phx15625 (fortran)
     The  optimizer  bungles substrings  of a  character variable
     when the variable was last assigned a constant value.












List of Fixed Errors          G-45                        SRB10.2


phx15626 (fortran)
     The  optimizer  bungles substrings  of a  character variable
     which is also a named constant.
phx15629 (send_mail)
     when  I use  version 7.3  of send_mail  (invoked byesdm) the
     kill  char and  kill line characters  I hav set  with a stty
     command do  not work.  They  work in most  other systems.  I
     have (^h) for fkill char and (^x) for delete line.
phx15635 (AG92-05 documentation)
     Page 3-352 is a duplicate of 3-351.
phx15648 (DOC (menu_delete.info))
     The positions of the Syntax and Function sections need to be
     exchanged.  The "help" command is  not very forgiving of its
     current format.
phx15653 (MPM Commands AG92-05)
     is missing lev and rev commands.
phx15654 (MPM Commands AG92-05)
     Short name as given for area_status is incorrect.
phx15655 (ec (with new &on feature))
     Mishandles white lines.
phx15662 (TTF)
     VT100 seems to have a bad initial_string.
phx15667 (DOC (value_set_path.info))
     This  info  file  provides  an  incorrect  syntax  and omits
     information.   The  "path"  argument,  contrary  to  what is
     stated  in the  info file,  need not  be supplied  or may be
     supplied as "".
phx15688 (Doc (print.info))
     The addname "pr.info" seems to have disappeared.  The status
     information  indicates  that this  segment has  been updated
     recently, so I suspect that it  was an oversight in a recent
     installation.
phx15696 (fortran large arrays)
     Error  message 136  relating to  large arrays  (255 pages or
     less)  contains  the wrong  constant as  the upper  bound on
     array size.
phx15719 (ted)
     ted  no longer  automatically loads  "user_library.ted" into
     b( )  the first time it is referenced.
phx15746 (print_configuration_deck (pcd))
     Several bugs in pcd.
phx15749 (AG92-05 MPM Commands)
     should document the valid_pictured_data command/af.












List of Fixed Errors          G-46                        SRB10.2


phx15751 (AG92-05:  mbx_create)
     On page 3-512,  the list of extended access  placed on a new
     mailbox is incorrect.
phx15767 (error_table_)
     Spelling error in error_table_$order_error.
phx15775 (fortran)
     If the optimizer decides to replace an implied do-loop in an
     I/O statement with a vector transfer, the loop index is left
     undefined.
phx15782 (enter_abs_request.info)
     >doc>info>enter_abs_request.info  is missing  the short name
     ear.info.
phx15786 (window_call info_seg)
     The wdc info_seg is non-standard.
phx15787 (info segs)
     library_map.info missing short name of lm.info
phx15788 (dial_out)
     EXL dial_out  on MIT and  CISL gets garbage  characters sent
     down the line.
phx15798 (fortran)
     A bug  in the optimizer  can cause it  to die from  a record
     quota overflow on the process directory.
phx15800 (xmail)
     Doesn't have a proper cleanup handler.
phx15801 (ted file-io)
     Given  one  pathname,  ted  gives  a  msg  that  a different
     pathname cannot be found, and thus 'blows' a ted$com.
phx15808 (documentation)
     documentation of cv_ttf has disappeared
phx15822 (exec_com version 2)
     will loop  if the bit_count  of an exec_com  is smaller than
     the actual bit count
phx15825 (Fortran)
     When the  defer and carriage  control options are  in effect
     for a  fortran program running in  an absentee, newlines are
     sometimes missing in the output.
phx15838 (metering)
     trafic_control_queue not working.
phx15839 (exec_com)
     Useless output when a version 2 exec_com is missing an &quit
     statement.














List of Fixed Errors          G-47                        SRB10.2


phx15842 (term_)
     term_ has a call to task_ctl_$map
phx15849 (list_accessible)
     Doesn't do what info seg says it will.
phx15857 (fortran)
     Fortran gets  a fatal Runtime  error when doing  output to a
     tape via tape_nstd_ when the record length is not a multiple
     of 4 characters.
phx15858 (library_cleanup command documentation, AN80)
     library_cleanup documentation indicates file will be deleted
     based  on  last  modified  date.  This  is  true  except for
     special check for last up time.
phx15865 (AG92-05 Commands and Active Functions manual)
     several command descriptions are missing
phx15866 (enter_problem_report or dial_out)
     epr breaks an input line when  it has wrapped around past 80
     characters
phx15871 (enter_problem_report)
     Only allows 75 characters for the area.
phx15872 (enter_problem_report)
     Gets confused if  the test case contains a  line with just a
     period.
phx15873 (info seg for "set_volume_quota")
     The ">doc>info>svq.info" segment has a formatting error.
phx15874 (Emacs and video-system ctl)
     Emacs gets an error while I  am editing.  It appears to be a
     problem conserned with the video_system_ctl interaction.
phx15881 (info segs)
     vls.info doesn't document the -data ctl_arg.
phx15892 (set_max_length command)
     set_max_length rejects a length of 255K.
phx15905 (mrds)
     dmdm does not correctly generate a cmdb segment if an excess
     number of attributes exist in a relation
phx15908 (EXL read_mail (version 8.8))
     gets attempt to reference through  ASCII data when trying to
     find an exec_com.
phx15918 (system AF)
     Should return quoted strings.
phx15922 (traffic_control_queue (tcq))
     doesn't work when the system has a large sst.














List of Fixed Errors          G-48                        SRB10.2


phx15926 (exec_com (version 2))
     Gets confused about &if &[equal...]  test when &on units are
     used.  Also  gets fault_tag_1 when  &on unit attempts  to do
     nonlocal &goto.
phx15927 (MRDS using TSS with LINUS)
     While  using  LINUS  to search  a  MRDS base  to  retrieve a
     multiple  response I  received the  following error notice--
     Attempt     by      mu_sec_set_tuple$next|1054     (>system_
     library_standard>bound_mpds_)  to   reference  through  null
     pointer
phx15934 (pl1 28b)
     Gets null pointer condition in code generator.
phx15949 (documentation)
     Typo in AG91-03
phx15951 (MPM Subroutines manual (AG93-04))
     argument  mode_string_info_ptr to  mode_string_$parse should
     be output rather than input
phx15958 (emacs and the video system)
     When I return to command level from emacs via ^Z^Z or break,
     more_mode is  reset to the  default value and not  to what I
     had prior to entering emacs.
phx15961 (fortran (-brief_table))
     The  -brief_table  argument does  not create  shorter object
     segments than -table.
phx15973 (xmail 2.0 (EXL))
     took a not_in_write_bracket fault in xmail_valdate_$addr.
phx15986 (documentation (AG93-04))
     Documentation of tty_ is inaccurate or incomplete in places
phx15999 (probe)
     EXL probe doesn't allow value CONSTANT_PTR -> BASED_VARIABLE
     type references
phx16000 (probe)
     EXL probe  doesn not work well  on structures with character
     variables which  have a length  based on an  external static
     variable.
phx16008 (mail)
     rdm -quit,  rdm -count -quit,  and rdm -count  -request quit
     should  all  produce  the  same  result.   i.e.   report the
     message count
phx16009 (window_call.info)
     is  misformatted,  making  it  work  incorrectly  with  help
     -brief.
phx16013 (Emacs mail (version 12.0b in EXL))
     Improperly indents the header of the message when it is sent
     if the user  has used ^X.  to type  indented paragraphs into
     the text.









List of Fixed Errors          G-49                        SRB10.2


phx16024 (MPM Commands (AG92-05))
     omits print_link_info documentation.
phx16065 (System Reliability/Maintainability/Integrity)
     Serious hardware failures are not metered/reported.
phx16073 (EXL probe)
     Can't find source files.
phx16079 (set_max_length)
     refuses to set max length to 255K (ie, 261120).
phx16096 (condition_info_header.incl.pl1)
     has a version element in the structure, but no indication of
     what it should be set to.
phx16104 (date/time active functions)
     dteq fix backed out
phx16105 (date_time_valid)
     info/implementation discrepancy
phx16113 (fortran)
     The DELETE option of the CLOSE statement does not conform to
     the '77 FORTRAN Standard.
phx16124 (Multics tutorial)
     The  tutorial  command  will  take  a 'not_in_write_bracket'
     fault for some menu choices.
phx16147 (EXL Pascal)
     EXL Pascal compiler is completely broken
phx16161 (format_document_$string)
     This  subroutine  does  a  poor  job  of  filling  some text
     strings.
phx16165 (Mail System)
     If  using rdm  -nack, the sender  gets a  msg about deletion
     without reading even if you do read it.
phx16169 (delete_$path)
     delete_$path trys  to call installation_tools_$delentry_file
     for no good reason.
phx16173 (azm)
     azm references amu_et_ which is retained in amu_, but not an
     addname.
phx16174 (>sss>bound_fscom2_ add_name)
     add_name is chasing links to verify existance of the target.
phx16175 (move command)
     The command gives a bogus message when trying to move a MSF.
     This started since the installation of extended object.















List of Fixed Errors          G-50                        SRB10.2


phx16177 (Documentation (info segments))
     Newly installed info segments for obsolete programs.
phx16179 (probe)
     probe  can't  resolve  reference   when  a  variable  and  a
     structure component have the same name
phx16183 (manage_volume_pool info seg)
     The   info  seg   >doc>info>mvp.info  contains   the  string
     {-control_args} in the syntax line but does not describe any
     control arguments.
phx16207 (fim_meters)
     fim_meters is broken as of 83-10-22.
phx16210 (analyze_multics)
     -ch type dump output is incorrect
phx16211 (analyze_multics)
     typo in argument recognition
phx16213 (exl mail)
     listing     or     printing     of     the     message    in
     >udd>GEISCO>FLittle>xx.mbx  causes  a  fatal  error  in  the
     process
phx16214 (forum)
     Fatal error when doing a pi after quiting from forum
phx16224 (print)
     The print  command no longer  prints line numbers  for blank
     lines.
phx16242 (read_mail)
     read_mail.info does not have the name rdm.info.
phx16245 (edit_error_list)
     Destroys  error_list  segments  which  are  longer  than  64
     records.
phx16246 (xmail)
     My xmail profile should request name of file in which I wish
     to log outgoing  new mail.  As of todays  date this does not
     take place.  (Hope its not me ).
phx16248 (copy_dir_)
     fails when -force_no_type is given.
phx16254 (X.25)
     Attempted dial_out to DATAPAC  from SystemM X.25 multiplexer
     causes the mux to crash.
phx16286 (azm)
     There  is  no  info  file describing  the  structure library
     mechanism.














List of Fixed Errors          G-51                        SRB10.2









                            CONTENTS


                                                         Page

Section 1     Introduction  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-1

Section 2     Highlights of MR10.2  . . . . . . . . . .  2-1
                 Hardware Support . . . . . . . . . . .  2-1
                 Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-1
                 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-2
                 New User Software  . . . . . . . . . .  2-2
                 Priced Software Products . . . . . . .  2-2

Section 3     Contents of MR10.2  . . . . . . . . . . .  3-1
                 Performance Enhancements . . . . . . .  3-1
                    System Initialization . . . . . . .  3-1
                    System Operation  . . . . . . . . .  3-1
                    User Software . . . . . . . . . . .  3-2
                 Hardware Support . . . . . . . . . . .  3-3
                    I/O Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . .  3-3
                    Peripheral Devices  . . . . . . . .  3-4
                    Communications  . . . . . . . . . .  3-5
                       Removal of Support . . . . . . .  3-6
                 BOS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-6
                 Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-7
                    System Initialization . . . . . . .  3-7
                    Configuration Parameters  . . . . .  3-8
                    Tuning Parameters . . . . . . . . .  3-9
                    Storage System Enhancements . . . .  3-10
                    Answering Service and System
                     Administration . . . . . . . . . .  3-14
                    Process Environment . . . . . . . .  3-16
                    Operator Console Support  . . . . .  3-18
                    Other Supervisor Changes  . . . . .  3-20
                 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-20
                    FNP Software  . . . . . . . . . . .  3-20
                    CDT Changes . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-22
                    TTF Changes . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-23
                    Communications Metering . . . . . .  3-25
                    Other Communication Enhancements  .  3-26
                 Online Software  . . . . . . . . . . .  3-26
                    Accessing the System  . . . . . . .  3-26
                    Archive Pathname Support  . . . . .  3-27
                    Metering Tools  . . . . . . . . . .  3-27
                    Online Testing  . . . . . . . . . .  3-28


DRAFT:  MAY BE CHANGED         iii           01/06/84     SRB10.2


                         CONTENTS (cont)


                                                         Page

                    Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-30
                    System Programming and Library
                     Maintenance  . . . . . . . . . . .  3-31
                    Tape Software . . . . . . . . . . .  3-36
                    Commands Using Value Segments . . .  3-38
                    Other Online Library Software . . .  3-39
                 Multics Priced Software Products . . .  3-47
                    APL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-47
                    COBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-47
                    EMACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-47
                    Executive Mail  . . . . . . . . . .  3-49
                    Extended Mail Facility  . . . . . .  3-49
                       print_mail . . . . . . . . . . .  3-50
                       read_mail and print_mail . . . .  3-50
                       read_mail  . . . . . . . . . . .  3-51
                       send_mail  . . . . . . . . . . .  3-53
                       Other Mail Utilities . . . . . .  3-54
                    FORTRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-55
                    Forum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-59
                    GCOS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-61
                    Graphics Facility . . . . . . . . .  3-63
                    Inter-Multics File Transfer (IMFT)   3-64
                    Logical Inquiry Update System
                     (LINUS)  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-66
                    Menu Facility . . . . . . . . . . .  3-67
                    MRDS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-67
                    WORDPRO Comprehensive Facility  . .  3-68

Section 4     Incompatible Changes  . . . . . . . . . .  4-1
                 Storage System . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-1
                 Answering Service and System
                  Administration  . . . . . . . . . . .  4-1
                 Process Environment  . . . . . . . . .  4-2
                 System Programming and Library
                  Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-2
                 Tape Software  . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-4
                 Other Online Library Software  . . . .  4-4
                 Extended Mail Facility . . . . . . . .  4-5
                 Forum  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-6
                 FORTRAN  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-6
                 Inter-Multics File Transfer (IMFT) . .  4-7
                 MRDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-7
                 WORDPRO Comprehensive Facility . . . .  4-8

Appendix A    Commands and Subroutines  . . . . . . . .  A-1
                 New Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-1
                    add_pnotice . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-1
                    analyze_multics . . . . . . . . . .  A-1


DRAFT:  MAY BE CHANGED         iv            01/06/84     SRB10.2


                         CONTENTS (cont)


                                                         Page

                    cancel_imft_request . . . . . . . .  A-1
                    cancel_output_request . . . . . . .  A-1
                    compare_configuration_deck  . . . .  A-1
                    compare_pl1.ec  . . . . . . . . . .  A-1
                    component . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-1
                    cv_links_to_mail_table  . . . . . .  A-1
                    describe_psp  . . . . . . . . . . .  A-1
                    dial_out  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-2
                    display_cdt . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-2
                    display_fnp_idle  . . . . . . . . .  A-2
                    display_pnotice . . . . . . . . . .  A-2
                    enter_imft_request  . . . . . . . .  A-2
                    enter_output_request  . . . . . . .  A-2
                    entry_path  . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-2
                    explain_doc . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-2
                    forum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-2
                    forum_accept_notifications  . . . .  A-2
                    forum_add_participant . . . . . . .  A-2
                    forum_add_project . . . . . . . . .  A-2
                    forum_admin . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-2
                    forum_create  . . . . . . . . . . .  A-3
                    forum_delete  . . . . . . . . . . .  A-3
                    forum_dir . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-3
                    forum_list_meetings . . . . . . . .  A-3
                    forum_list_users  . . . . . . . . .  A-3
                    forum_make_public . . . . . . . . .  A-3
                    forum_refuse_notifications  . . . .  A-3
                    forum_remove_participant  . . . . .  A-3
                    forum_remove_project  . . . . . . .  A-3
                    forum_unmake_public . . . . . . . .  A-3
                    gcos_label_tape . . . . . . . . . .  A-3
                    gcos_tss_build_library  . . . . . .  A-3
                    have_messages . . . . . . . . . . .  A-3
                    hc_pf_meters  . . . . . . . . . . .  A-3
                    is_component_pathname . . . . . . .  A-4
                    list_imft_requests  . . . . . . . .  A-4
                    list_output_requests  . . . . . . .  A-4
                    login_args  . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-4
                    meter_fnp_idle  . . . . . . . . . .  A-4
                    move_imft_request . . . . . . . . .  A-4
                    move_output_request . . . . . . . .  A-4
                    peruse_crossref . . . . . . . . . .  A-4
                    reconnect_ec_enable . . . . . . . .  A-4
                    reconnect_ec_disable  . . . . . . .  A-4
                    restructure_mrds_db . . . . . . . .  A-4
                    scavenge_vol  . . . . . . . . . . .  A-4
                    set_system_console  . . . . . . . .  A-5
                    set_x25_packet_threshold  . . . . .  A-5


DRAFT:  MAY BE CHANGED          v            01/06/84     SRB10.2


                         CONTENTS (cont)


                                                         Page

                    set_mc_message_limits . . . . . . .  A-5
                    shortest_path . . . . . . . . . . .  A-5
                    signal  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-5
                    strip_component . . . . . . . . . .  A-5
                    total_output_requests . . . . . . .  A-5
                    trace_mcs . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-5
                    tutorial  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-5
                    vtoc_buffer_meters  . . . . . . . .  A-5
                    where_doc . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-5
                 New Subroutines  . . . . . . . . . . .  A-6
                    cb_menu_  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-6
                    cb_window_  . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-6
                    compute_common_aim_ceiling_ . . . .  A-6
                    cv_error_$name  . . . . . . . . . .  A-6
                    ft_menu_  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-6
                    ft_window_  . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-6
                    get_ec_version_ . . . . . . . . . .  A-6
                    get_system_aim_attributes_  . . . .  A-6
                    hcs_$validate_process_id  . . . . .  A-6
                    initiate_file_$create . . . . . . .  A-6
                    iox_$close_file . . . . . . . . . .  A-6
                    iox_$detach . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-6
                    iox_$open_file  . . . . . . . . . .  A-6
                    mlr_  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-6
                    mrl_  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-6
                    mvt_  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-7
                    qedx_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-7
                    sort_seg_ . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-7
                    ssu_  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-7
                    system_info_$version_id . . . . . .  A-7
                    tape_ioi_ . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-7
                    timed_io_ . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-7
                    translate_aim_attributes_ . . . . .  A-7

Appendix B    Multics Priced Software Products  . . . .  B-1
                 MR10.1 Software  . . . . . . . . . . .  B-1
                 MR10.0 Software  . . . . . . . . . . .  B-1
                 Operating System Software  . . . . . .  B-1
                 Operating System Software Extensions .  B-1
                 Communications Software  . . . . . . .  B-1
                 Programming Language Software  . . . .  B-2
                 Operating System Utilities and Tools .  B-2
                 Data Management Software . . . . . . .  B-2
                 Applications Software  . . . . . . . .  B-2

Appendix C    Documentation Changes . . . . . . . . . .  C-1
                 Current Multics Documentation Status .  C-1
                    MR10.0 Documentation  . . . . . . .  C-1


DRAFT:  MAY BE CHANGED         vi            01/06/84     SRB10.2


                         CONTENTS (cont)


                                                         Page

                    MR10.1 Documentation  . . . . . . .  C-2
                    MR10.2 Documentation  . . . . . . .  C-3
                    Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  C-3

Appendix D    Reliability and Availability Enhancements
               to the Storage System  . . . . . . . . .  D-1
                 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . .  D-1
                 Recovery After Crash Without ESD . . .  D-1
                    Changes from MR9.1  . . . . . . . .  D-2
                    Volume Inconsistencies  . . . . . .  D-2
                    Salvaging the RPV . . . . . . . . .  D-4
                    Salvaging the RLV . . . . . . . . .  D-4
                    Salvaging Other Volumes . . . . . .  D-4
                    Directory Salvaging During
                     Initialization . . . . . . . . . .  D-4
                    Miscellaneous Items . . . . . . . .  D-4
                 Changes to the Layout of a Disk Volume  D-5
                    Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  D-5
                    Dumper Bit Map  . . . . . . . . . .  D-5
                    VTOC Map  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  D-5
                    VTOCEs  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  D-5
                 Disk Volume Layout Conversion  . . . .  D-6
                 Wired Memory Increase  . . . . . . . .  D-6
                 Include File Changes . . . . . . . . .  D-7

Appendix E    Recovering Masked FNP Channels  . . . . .  E-1

Appendix F    Satellite 6M  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  F-1
                 Multics Notes  . . . . . . . . . . . .  F-1
                 Level 6 Notes  . . . . . . . . . . . .  F-3
                    Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  F-7

Appendix G    List of Fixed Errors  . . . . . . . . . .  G-1
                 Field Reported Errors  . . . . . . . .  G-1
                 Errors Reported During Exposure and
                  Test  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  G-18














DRAFT:  MAY BE CHANGED         vii           01/06/84     SRB10.2

                                          -----------------------------------------------------------


Historical Background

This edition of the Multics software materials and documentation is provided and donated
to Massachusetts Institute of Technology by Group BULL including BULL HN Information Systems Inc. 
as a contribution to computer science knowledge.  
This donation is made also to give evidence of the common contributions of Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
Bell Laboratories, General Electric, Honeywell Information Systems Inc., Honeywell BULL Inc., Groupe BULL
and BULL HN Information Systems Inc. to the development of this operating system. 
Multics development was initiated by Massachusetts Institute of Technology Project MAC (1963-1970),
renamed the MIT Laboratory for Computer Science and Artificial Intelligence in the mid 1970s, under the leadership
of Professor Fernando Jose Corbato. Users consider that Multics provided the best software architecture 
for managing computer hardware properly and for executing programs. Many subsequent operating systems 
incorporated Multics principles.
Multics was distributed in 1975 to 2000 by Group Bull in Europe , and in the U.S. by Bull HN Information Systems Inc., 
as successor in interest by change in name only to Honeywell Bull Inc. and Honeywell Information Systems Inc. .

                                          -----------------------------------------------------------

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute these programs and their documentation for any purpose and without
fee is hereby granted,provided that the below copyright notice and historical background appear in all copies
and that both the copyright notice and historical background and this permission notice appear in supporting
documentation, and that the names of MIT, HIS, BULL or BULL HN not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining
to distribution of the programs without specific prior written permission.
    Copyright 1972 by Massachusetts Institute of Technology and Honeywell Information Systems Inc.
    Copyright 2006 by BULL HN Information Systems Inc.
    Copyright 2006 by Bull SAS
    All Rights Reserved